You can not select more than 25 topics Topics must start with a letter or number, can include dashes ('-') and can be up to 35 characters long.

10366 lines
279KB

  1. @chapter Filtering Introduction
  2. @c man begin FILTERING INTRODUCTION
  3. Filtering in FFmpeg is enabled through the libavfilter library.
  4. In libavfilter, a filter can have multiple inputs and multiple
  5. outputs.
  6. To illustrate the sorts of things that are possible, we consider the
  7. following filtergraph.
  8. @example
  9. [main]
  10. input --> split ---------------------> overlay --> output
  11. | ^
  12. |[tmp] [flip]|
  13. +-----> crop --> vflip -------+
  14. @end example
  15. This filtergraph splits the input stream in two streams, sends one
  16. stream through the crop filter and the vflip filter before merging it
  17. back with the other stream by overlaying it on top. You can use the
  18. following command to achieve this:
  19. @example
  20. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "split [main][tmp]; [tmp] crop=iw:ih/2:0:0, vflip [flip]; [main][flip] overlay=0:H/2" OUTPUT
  21. @end example
  22. The result will be that in output the top half of the video is mirrored
  23. onto the bottom half.
  24. Filters in the same linear chain are separated by commas, and distinct
  25. linear chains of filters are separated by semicolons. In our example,
  26. @var{crop,vflip} are in one linear chain, @var{split} and
  27. @var{overlay} are separately in another. The points where the linear
  28. chains join are labelled by names enclosed in square brackets. In the
  29. example, the split filter generates two outputs that are associated to
  30. the labels @var{[main]} and @var{[tmp]}.
  31. The stream sent to the second output of @var{split}, labelled as
  32. @var{[tmp]}, is processed through the @var{crop} filter, which crops
  33. away the lower half part of the video, and then vertically flipped. The
  34. @var{overlay} filter takes in input the first unchanged output of the
  35. split filter (which was labelled as @var{[main]}), and overlay on its
  36. lower half the output generated by the @var{crop,vflip} filterchain.
  37. Some filters take in input a list of parameters: they are specified
  38. after the filter name and an equal sign, and are separated from each other
  39. by a colon.
  40. There exist so-called @var{source filters} that do not have an
  41. audio/video input, and @var{sink filters} that will not have audio/video
  42. output.
  43. @c man end FILTERING INTRODUCTION
  44. @chapter graph2dot
  45. @c man begin GRAPH2DOT
  46. The @file{graph2dot} program included in the FFmpeg @file{tools}
  47. directory can be used to parse a filtergraph description and issue a
  48. corresponding textual representation in the dot language.
  49. Invoke the command:
  50. @example
  51. graph2dot -h
  52. @end example
  53. to see how to use @file{graph2dot}.
  54. You can then pass the dot description to the @file{dot} program (from
  55. the graphviz suite of programs) and obtain a graphical representation
  56. of the filtergraph.
  57. For example the sequence of commands:
  58. @example
  59. echo @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} | \
  60. tools/graph2dot -o graph.tmp && \
  61. dot -Tpng graph.tmp -o graph.png && \
  62. display graph.png
  63. @end example
  64. can be used to create and display an image representing the graph
  65. described by the @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} string. Note that this string must be
  66. a complete self-contained graph, with its inputs and outputs explicitly defined.
  67. For example if your command line is of the form:
  68. @example
  69. ffmpeg -i infile -vf scale=640:360 outfile
  70. @end example
  71. your @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} string will need to be of the form:
  72. @example
  73. nullsrc,scale=640:360,nullsink
  74. @end example
  75. you may also need to set the @var{nullsrc} parameters and add a @var{format}
  76. filter in order to simulate a specific input file.
  77. @c man end GRAPH2DOT
  78. @chapter Filtergraph description
  79. @c man begin FILTERGRAPH DESCRIPTION
  80. A filtergraph is a directed graph of connected filters. It can contain
  81. cycles, and there can be multiple links between a pair of
  82. filters. Each link has one input pad on one side connecting it to one
  83. filter from which it takes its input, and one output pad on the other
  84. side connecting it to the one filter accepting its output.
  85. Each filter in a filtergraph is an instance of a filter class
  86. registered in the application, which defines the features and the
  87. number of input and output pads of the filter.
  88. A filter with no input pads is called a "source", a filter with no
  89. output pads is called a "sink".
  90. @anchor{Filtergraph syntax}
  91. @section Filtergraph syntax
  92. A filtergraph can be represented using a textual representation, which is
  93. recognized by the @option{-filter}/@option{-vf} and @option{-filter_complex}
  94. options in @command{ffmpeg} and @option{-vf} in @command{ffplay}, and by the
  95. @code{avfilter_graph_parse()}/@code{avfilter_graph_parse2()} function defined in
  96. @file{libavfilter/avfilter.h}.
  97. A filterchain consists of a sequence of connected filters, each one
  98. connected to the previous one in the sequence. A filterchain is
  99. represented by a list of ","-separated filter descriptions.
  100. A filtergraph consists of a sequence of filterchains. A sequence of
  101. filterchains is represented by a list of ";"-separated filterchain
  102. descriptions.
  103. A filter is represented by a string of the form:
  104. [@var{in_link_1}]...[@var{in_link_N}]@var{filter_name}=@var{arguments}[@var{out_link_1}]...[@var{out_link_M}]
  105. @var{filter_name} is the name of the filter class of which the
  106. described filter is an instance of, and has to be the name of one of
  107. the filter classes registered in the program.
  108. The name of the filter class is optionally followed by a string
  109. "=@var{arguments}".
  110. @var{arguments} is a string which contains the parameters used to
  111. initialize the filter instance. It may have one of the following forms:
  112. @itemize
  113. @item
  114. A ':'-separated list of @var{key=value} pairs.
  115. @item
  116. A ':'-separated list of @var{value}. In this case, the keys are assumed to be
  117. the option names in the order they are declared. E.g. the @code{fade} filter
  118. declares three options in this order -- @option{type}, @option{start_frame} and
  119. @option{nb_frames}. Then the parameter list @var{in:0:30} means that the value
  120. @var{in} is assigned to the option @option{type}, @var{0} to
  121. @option{start_frame} and @var{30} to @option{nb_frames}.
  122. @item
  123. A ':'-separated list of mixed direct @var{value} and long @var{key=value}
  124. pairs. The direct @var{value} must precede the @var{key=value} pairs, and
  125. follow the same constraints order of the previous point. The following
  126. @var{key=value} pairs can be set in any preferred order.
  127. @end itemize
  128. If the option value itself is a list of items (e.g. the @code{format} filter
  129. takes a list of pixel formats), the items in the list are usually separated by
  130. '|'.
  131. The list of arguments can be quoted using the character "'" as initial
  132. and ending mark, and the character '\' for escaping the characters
  133. within the quoted text; otherwise the argument string is considered
  134. terminated when the next special character (belonging to the set
  135. "[]=;,") is encountered.
  136. The name and arguments of the filter are optionally preceded and
  137. followed by a list of link labels.
  138. A link label allows to name a link and associate it to a filter output
  139. or input pad. The preceding labels @var{in_link_1}
  140. ... @var{in_link_N}, are associated to the filter input pads,
  141. the following labels @var{out_link_1} ... @var{out_link_M}, are
  142. associated to the output pads.
  143. When two link labels with the same name are found in the
  144. filtergraph, a link between the corresponding input and output pad is
  145. created.
  146. If an output pad is not labelled, it is linked by default to the first
  147. unlabelled input pad of the next filter in the filterchain.
  148. For example in the filterchain:
  149. @example
  150. nullsrc, split[L1], [L2]overlay, nullsink
  151. @end example
  152. the split filter instance has two output pads, and the overlay filter
  153. instance two input pads. The first output pad of split is labelled
  154. "L1", the first input pad of overlay is labelled "L2", and the second
  155. output pad of split is linked to the second input pad of overlay,
  156. which are both unlabelled.
  157. In a complete filterchain all the unlabelled filter input and output
  158. pads must be connected. A filtergraph is considered valid if all the
  159. filter input and output pads of all the filterchains are connected.
  160. Libavfilter will automatically insert @ref{scale} filters where format
  161. conversion is required. It is possible to specify swscale flags
  162. for those automatically inserted scalers by prepending
  163. @code{sws_flags=@var{flags};}
  164. to the filtergraph description.
  165. Follows a BNF description for the filtergraph syntax:
  166. @example
  167. @var{NAME} ::= sequence of alphanumeric characters and '_'
  168. @var{LINKLABEL} ::= "[" @var{NAME} "]"
  169. @var{LINKLABELS} ::= @var{LINKLABEL} [@var{LINKLABELS}]
  170. @var{FILTER_ARGUMENTS} ::= sequence of chars (eventually quoted)
  171. @var{FILTER} ::= [@var{LINKLABELS}] @var{NAME} ["=" @var{FILTER_ARGUMENTS}] [@var{LINKLABELS}]
  172. @var{FILTERCHAIN} ::= @var{FILTER} [,@var{FILTERCHAIN}]
  173. @var{FILTERGRAPH} ::= [sws_flags=@var{flags};] @var{FILTERCHAIN} [;@var{FILTERGRAPH}]
  174. @end example
  175. @section Notes on filtergraph escaping
  176. Filtergraph description composition entails several levels of
  177. escaping. See @ref{quoting_and_escaping,,the "Quoting and escaping"
  178. section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils} for more
  179. information about the employed escaping procedure.
  180. A first level escaping affects the content of each filter option
  181. value, which may contain the special character @code{:} used to
  182. separate values, or one of the escaping characters @code{\'}.
  183. A second level escaping affects the whole filter description, which
  184. may contain the escaping characters @code{\'} or the special
  185. characters @code{[],;} used by the filtergraph description.
  186. Finally, when you specify a filtergraph on a shell commandline, you
  187. need to perform a third level escaping for the shell special
  188. characters contained within it.
  189. For example, consider the following string to be embedded in
  190. the @ref{drawtext} filter description @option{text} value:
  191. @example
  192. this is a 'string': may contain one, or more, special characters
  193. @end example
  194. This string contains the @code{'} special escaping character, and the
  195. @code{:} special character, so it needs to be escaped in this way:
  196. @example
  197. text=this is a \'string\'\: may contain one, or more, special characters
  198. @end example
  199. A second level of escaping is required when embedding the filter
  200. description in a filtergraph description, in order to escape all the
  201. filtergraph special characters. Thus the example above becomes:
  202. @example
  203. drawtext=text=this is a \\\'string\\\'\\: may contain one\, or more\, special characters
  204. @end example
  205. (note that in addition to the @code{\'} escaping special characters,
  206. also @code{,} needs to be escaped).
  207. Finally an additional level of escaping is needed when writing the
  208. filtergraph description in a shell command, which depends on the
  209. escaping rules of the adopted shell. For example, assuming that
  210. @code{\} is special and needs to be escaped with another @code{\}, the
  211. previous string will finally result in:
  212. @example
  213. -vf "drawtext=text=this is a \\\\\\'string\\\\\\'\\\\: may contain one\\, or more\\, special characters"
  214. @end example
  215. @chapter Timeline editing
  216. Some filters support a generic @option{enable} option. For the filters
  217. supporting timeline editing, this option can be set to an expression which is
  218. evaluated before sending a frame to the filter. If the evaluation is non-zero,
  219. the filter will be enabled, otherwise the frame will be sent unchanged to the
  220. next filter in the filtergraph.
  221. The expression accepts the following values:
  222. @table @samp
  223. @item t
  224. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  225. @item n
  226. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0
  227. @item pos
  228. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  229. @end table
  230. Additionally, these filters support an @option{enable} command that can be used
  231. to re-define the expression.
  232. Like any other filtering option, the @option{enable} option follows the same
  233. rules.
  234. For example, to enable a blur filter (@ref{smartblur}) from 10 seconds to 3
  235. minutes, and a @ref{curves} filter starting at 3 seconds:
  236. @example
  237. smartblur = enable='between(t,10,3*60)',
  238. curves = enable='gte(t,3)' : preset=cross_process
  239. @end example
  240. @c man end FILTERGRAPH DESCRIPTION
  241. @chapter Audio Filters
  242. @c man begin AUDIO FILTERS
  243. When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
  244. existing filters using @code{--disable-filters}.
  245. The configure output will show the audio filters included in your
  246. build.
  247. Below is a description of the currently available audio filters.
  248. @section aconvert
  249. Convert the input audio format to the specified formats.
  250. @emph{This filter is deprecated. Use @ref{aformat} instead.}
  251. The filter accepts a string of the form:
  252. "@var{sample_format}:@var{channel_layout}".
  253. @var{sample_format} specifies the sample format, and can be a string or the
  254. corresponding numeric value defined in @file{libavutil/samplefmt.h}. Use 'p'
  255. suffix for a planar sample format.
  256. @var{channel_layout} specifies the channel layout, and can be a string
  257. or the corresponding number value defined in @file{libavutil/channel_layout.h}.
  258. The special parameter "auto", signifies that the filter will
  259. automatically select the output format depending on the output filter.
  260. @subsection Examples
  261. @itemize
  262. @item
  263. Convert input to float, planar, stereo:
  264. @example
  265. aconvert=fltp:stereo
  266. @end example
  267. @item
  268. Convert input to unsigned 8-bit, automatically select out channel layout:
  269. @example
  270. aconvert=u8:auto
  271. @end example
  272. @end itemize
  273. @section adelay
  274. Delay one or more audio channels.
  275. Samples in delayed channel are filled with silence.
  276. The filter accepts the following option:
  277. @table @option
  278. @item delays
  279. Set list of delays in milliseconds for each channel separated by '|'.
  280. At least one delay greater than 0 should be provided.
  281. Unused delays will be silently ignored. If number of given delays is
  282. smaller than number of channels all remaining channels will not be delayed.
  283. @end table
  284. @subsection Examples
  285. @itemize
  286. @item
  287. Delay first channel by 1.5 seconds, the third channel by 0.5 seconds and leave
  288. the second channel (and any other channels that may be present) unchanged.
  289. @example
  290. adelay=1500|0|500
  291. @end example
  292. @end itemize
  293. @section aecho
  294. Apply echoing to the input audio.
  295. Echoes are reflected sound and can occur naturally amongst mountains
  296. (and sometimes large buildings) when talking or shouting; digital echo
  297. effects emulate this behaviour and are often used to help fill out the
  298. sound of a single instrument or vocal. The time difference between the
  299. original signal and the reflection is the @code{delay}, and the
  300. loudness of the reflected signal is the @code{decay}.
  301. Multiple echoes can have different delays and decays.
  302. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  303. @table @option
  304. @item in_gain
  305. Set input gain of reflected signal. Default is @code{0.6}.
  306. @item out_gain
  307. Set output gain of reflected signal. Default is @code{0.3}.
  308. @item delays
  309. Set list of time intervals in milliseconds between original signal and reflections
  310. separated by '|'. Allowed range for each @code{delay} is @code{(0 - 90000.0]}.
  311. Default is @code{1000}.
  312. @item decays
  313. Set list of loudnesses of reflected signals separated by '|'.
  314. Allowed range for each @code{decay} is @code{(0 - 1.0]}.
  315. Default is @code{0.5}.
  316. @end table
  317. @subsection Examples
  318. @itemize
  319. @item
  320. Make it sound as if there are twice as many instruments as are actually playing:
  321. @example
  322. aecho=0.8:0.88:60:0.4
  323. @end example
  324. @item
  325. If delay is very short, then it sound like a (metallic) robot playing music:
  326. @example
  327. aecho=0.8:0.88:6:0.4
  328. @end example
  329. @item
  330. A longer delay will sound like an open air concert in the mountains:
  331. @example
  332. aecho=0.8:0.9:1000:0.3
  333. @end example
  334. @item
  335. Same as above but with one more mountain:
  336. @example
  337. aecho=0.8:0.9:1000|1800:0.3|0.25
  338. @end example
  339. @end itemize
  340. @section aeval
  341. Modify an audio signal according to the specified expressions.
  342. This filter accepts one or more expressions (one for each channel),
  343. which are evaluated and used to modify a corresponding audio signal.
  344. This filter accepts the following options:
  345. @table @option
  346. @item exprs
  347. Set the '|'-separated expressions list for each separate channel. If
  348. the number of input channels is greater than the number of
  349. expressions, the last specified expression is used for the remaining
  350. output channels.
  351. @item channel_layout, c
  352. Set output channel layout. If not specified, the channel layout is
  353. specified by the number of expressions. If set to @samp{same}, it will
  354. use by default the same input channel layout.
  355. @end table
  356. Each expression in @var{exprs} can contain the following constants and functions:
  357. @table @option
  358. @item ch
  359. channel number of the current expression
  360. @item n
  361. number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
  362. @item s
  363. sample rate
  364. @item t
  365. time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds
  366. @item nb_in_channels
  367. @item nb_out_channels
  368. input and output number of channels
  369. @item val(CH)
  370. the value of input channel with number @var{CH}
  371. @end table
  372. Note: this filter is slow. For faster processing you should use a
  373. dedicated filter.
  374. @subsection Examples
  375. @itemize
  376. @item
  377. Half volume:
  378. @example
  379. aeval=val(ch)/2:c=same
  380. @end example
  381. @item
  382. Invert phase of the second channel:
  383. @example
  384. eval=val(0)|-val(1)
  385. @end example
  386. @end itemize
  387. @section afade
  388. Apply fade-in/out effect to input audio.
  389. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  390. @table @option
  391. @item type, t
  392. Specify the effect type, can be either @code{in} for fade-in, or
  393. @code{out} for a fade-out effect. Default is @code{in}.
  394. @item start_sample, ss
  395. Specify the number of the start sample for starting to apply the fade
  396. effect. Default is 0.
  397. @item nb_samples, ns
  398. Specify the number of samples for which the fade effect has to last. At
  399. the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
  400. volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
  401. the output audio will be silence. Default is 44100.
  402. @item start_time, st
  403. Specify time for starting to apply the fade effect. Default is 0.
  404. The accepted syntax is:
  405. @example
  406. [-]HH[:MM[:SS[.m...]]]
  407. [-]S+[.m...]
  408. @end example
  409. See also the function @code{av_parse_time()}.
  410. If set this option is used instead of @var{start_sample} one.
  411. @item duration, d
  412. Specify the duration for which the fade effect has to last. Default is 0.
  413. The accepted syntax is:
  414. @example
  415. [-]HH[:MM[:SS[.m...]]]
  416. [-]S+[.m...]
  417. @end example
  418. See also the function @code{av_parse_time()}.
  419. At the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
  420. volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
  421. the output audio will be silence.
  422. If set this option is used instead of @var{nb_samples} one.
  423. @item curve
  424. Set curve for fade transition.
  425. It accepts the following values:
  426. @table @option
  427. @item tri
  428. select triangular, linear slope (default)
  429. @item qsin
  430. select quarter of sine wave
  431. @item hsin
  432. select half of sine wave
  433. @item esin
  434. select exponential sine wave
  435. @item log
  436. select logarithmic
  437. @item par
  438. select inverted parabola
  439. @item qua
  440. select quadratic
  441. @item cub
  442. select cubic
  443. @item squ
  444. select square root
  445. @item cbr
  446. select cubic root
  447. @end table
  448. @end table
  449. @subsection Examples
  450. @itemize
  451. @item
  452. Fade in first 15 seconds of audio:
  453. @example
  454. afade=t=in:ss=0:d=15
  455. @end example
  456. @item
  457. Fade out last 25 seconds of a 900 seconds audio:
  458. @example
  459. afade=t=out:st=875:d=25
  460. @end example
  461. @end itemize
  462. @anchor{aformat}
  463. @section aformat
  464. Set output format constraints for the input audio. The framework will
  465. negotiate the most appropriate format to minimize conversions.
  466. The filter accepts the following named parameters:
  467. @table @option
  468. @item sample_fmts
  469. A '|'-separated list of requested sample formats.
  470. @item sample_rates
  471. A '|'-separated list of requested sample rates.
  472. @item channel_layouts
  473. A '|'-separated list of requested channel layouts.
  474. See @ref{channel layout syntax,,the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  475. for the required syntax.
  476. @end table
  477. If a parameter is omitted, all values are allowed.
  478. For example to force the output to either unsigned 8-bit or signed 16-bit stereo:
  479. @example
  480. aformat=sample_fmts=u8|s16:channel_layouts=stereo
  481. @end example
  482. @section allpass
  483. Apply a two-pole all-pass filter with central frequency (in Hz)
  484. @var{frequency}, and filter-width @var{width}.
  485. An all-pass filter changes the audio's frequency to phase relationship
  486. without changing its frequency to amplitude relationship.
  487. The filter accepts the following options:
  488. @table @option
  489. @item frequency, f
  490. Set frequency in Hz.
  491. @item width_type
  492. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  493. @table @option
  494. @item h
  495. Hz
  496. @item q
  497. Q-Factor
  498. @item o
  499. octave
  500. @item s
  501. slope
  502. @end table
  503. @item width, w
  504. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  505. @end table
  506. @section amerge
  507. Merge two or more audio streams into a single multi-channel stream.
  508. The filter accepts the following options:
  509. @table @option
  510. @item inputs
  511. Set the number of inputs. Default is 2.
  512. @end table
  513. If the channel layouts of the inputs are disjoint, and therefore compatible,
  514. the channel layout of the output will be set accordingly and the channels
  515. will be reordered as necessary. If the channel layouts of the inputs are not
  516. disjoint, the output will have all the channels of the first input then all
  517. the channels of the second input, in that order, and the channel layout of
  518. the output will be the default value corresponding to the total number of
  519. channels.
  520. For example, if the first input is in 2.1 (FL+FR+LF) and the second input
  521. is FC+BL+BR, then the output will be in 5.1, with the channels in the
  522. following order: a1, a2, b1, a3, b2, b3 (a1 is the first channel of the
  523. first input, b1 is the first channel of the second input).
  524. On the other hand, if both input are in stereo, the output channels will be
  525. in the default order: a1, a2, b1, b2, and the channel layout will be
  526. arbitrarily set to 4.0, which may or may not be the expected value.
  527. All inputs must have the same sample rate, and format.
  528. If inputs do not have the same duration, the output will stop with the
  529. shortest.
  530. @subsection Examples
  531. @itemize
  532. @item
  533. Merge two mono files into a stereo stream:
  534. @example
  535. amovie=left.wav [l] ; amovie=right.mp3 [r] ; [l] [r] amerge
  536. @end example
  537. @item
  538. Multiple merges assuming 1 video stream and 6 audio streams in @file{input.mkv}:
  539. @example
  540. ffmpeg -i input.mkv -filter_complex "[0:1][0:2][0:3][0:4][0:5][0:6] amerge=inputs=6" -c:a pcm_s16le output.mkv
  541. @end example
  542. @end itemize
  543. @section amix
  544. Mixes multiple audio inputs into a single output.
  545. For example
  546. @example
  547. ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex amix=inputs=3:duration=first:dropout_transition=3 OUTPUT
  548. @end example
  549. will mix 3 input audio streams to a single output with the same duration as the
  550. first input and a dropout transition time of 3 seconds.
  551. The filter accepts the following named parameters:
  552. @table @option
  553. @item inputs
  554. Number of inputs. If unspecified, it defaults to 2.
  555. @item duration
  556. How to determine the end-of-stream.
  557. @table @option
  558. @item longest
  559. Duration of longest input. (default)
  560. @item shortest
  561. Duration of shortest input.
  562. @item first
  563. Duration of first input.
  564. @end table
  565. @item dropout_transition
  566. Transition time, in seconds, for volume renormalization when an input
  567. stream ends. The default value is 2 seconds.
  568. @end table
  569. @section anull
  570. Pass the audio source unchanged to the output.
  571. @section apad
  572. Pad the end of a audio stream with silence, this can be used together with
  573. -shortest to extend audio streams to the same length as the video stream.
  574. @section aphaser
  575. Add a phasing effect to the input audio.
  576. A phaser filter creates series of peaks and troughs in the frequency spectrum.
  577. The position of the peaks and troughs are modulated so that they vary over time, creating a sweeping effect.
  578. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  579. @table @option
  580. @item in_gain
  581. Set input gain. Default is 0.4.
  582. @item out_gain
  583. Set output gain. Default is 0.74
  584. @item delay
  585. Set delay in milliseconds. Default is 3.0.
  586. @item decay
  587. Set decay. Default is 0.4.
  588. @item speed
  589. Set modulation speed in Hz. Default is 0.5.
  590. @item type
  591. Set modulation type. Default is triangular.
  592. It accepts the following values:
  593. @table @samp
  594. @item triangular, t
  595. @item sinusoidal, s
  596. @end table
  597. @end table
  598. @anchor{aresample}
  599. @section aresample
  600. Resample the input audio to the specified parameters, using the
  601. libswresample library. If none are specified then the filter will
  602. automatically convert between its input and output.
  603. This filter is also able to stretch/squeeze the audio data to make it match
  604. the timestamps or to inject silence / cut out audio to make it match the
  605. timestamps, do a combination of both or do neither.
  606. The filter accepts the syntax
  607. [@var{sample_rate}:]@var{resampler_options}, where @var{sample_rate}
  608. expresses a sample rate and @var{resampler_options} is a list of
  609. @var{key}=@var{value} pairs, separated by ":". See the
  610. ffmpeg-resampler manual for the complete list of supported options.
  611. @subsection Examples
  612. @itemize
  613. @item
  614. Resample the input audio to 44100Hz:
  615. @example
  616. aresample=44100
  617. @end example
  618. @item
  619. Stretch/squeeze samples to the given timestamps, with a maximum of 1000
  620. samples per second compensation:
  621. @example
  622. aresample=async=1000
  623. @end example
  624. @end itemize
  625. @section asetnsamples
  626. Set the number of samples per each output audio frame.
  627. The last output packet may contain a different number of samples, as
  628. the filter will flush all the remaining samples when the input audio
  629. signal its end.
  630. The filter accepts the following options:
  631. @table @option
  632. @item nb_out_samples, n
  633. Set the number of frames per each output audio frame. The number is
  634. intended as the number of samples @emph{per each channel}.
  635. Default value is 1024.
  636. @item pad, p
  637. If set to 1, the filter will pad the last audio frame with zeroes, so
  638. that the last frame will contain the same number of samples as the
  639. previous ones. Default value is 1.
  640. @end table
  641. For example, to set the number of per-frame samples to 1234 and
  642. disable padding for the last frame, use:
  643. @example
  644. asetnsamples=n=1234:p=0
  645. @end example
  646. @section asetrate
  647. Set the sample rate without altering the PCM data.
  648. This will result in a change of speed and pitch.
  649. The filter accepts the following options:
  650. @table @option
  651. @item sample_rate, r
  652. Set the output sample rate. Default is 44100 Hz.
  653. @end table
  654. @section ashowinfo
  655. Show a line containing various information for each input audio frame.
  656. The input audio is not modified.
  657. The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
  658. @var{key}:@var{value}.
  659. A description of each shown parameter follows:
  660. @table @option
  661. @item n
  662. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0
  663. @item pts
  664. Presentation timestamp of the input frame, in time base units; the time base
  665. depends on the filter input pad, and is usually 1/@var{sample_rate}.
  666. @item pts_time
  667. presentation timestamp of the input frame in seconds
  668. @item pos
  669. position of the frame in the input stream, -1 if this information in
  670. unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic audio)
  671. @item fmt
  672. sample format
  673. @item chlayout
  674. channel layout
  675. @item rate
  676. sample rate for the audio frame
  677. @item nb_samples
  678. number of samples (per channel) in the frame
  679. @item checksum
  680. Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of the audio data. For planar audio
  681. the data is treated as if all the planes were concatenated.
  682. @item plane_checksums
  683. A list of Adler-32 checksums for each data plane.
  684. @end table
  685. @section astats
  686. Display time domain statistical information about the audio channels.
  687. Statistics are calculated and displayed for each audio channel and,
  688. where applicable, an overall figure is also given.
  689. The filter accepts the following option:
  690. @table @option
  691. @item length
  692. Short window length in seconds, used for peak and trough RMS measurement.
  693. Default is @code{0.05} (50 miliseconds). Allowed range is @code{[0.1 - 10]}.
  694. @end table
  695. A description of each shown parameter follows:
  696. @table @option
  697. @item DC offset
  698. Mean amplitude displacement from zero.
  699. @item Min level
  700. Minimal sample level.
  701. @item Max level
  702. Maximal sample level.
  703. @item Peak level dB
  704. @item RMS level dB
  705. Standard peak and RMS level measured in dBFS.
  706. @item RMS peak dB
  707. @item RMS trough dB
  708. Peak and trough values for RMS level measured over a short window.
  709. @item Crest factor
  710. Standard ratio of peak to RMS level (note: not in dB).
  711. @item Flat factor
  712. Flatness (i.e. consecutive samples with the same value) of the signal at its peak levels
  713. (i.e. either @var{Min level} or @var{Max level}).
  714. @item Peak count
  715. Number of occasions (not the number of samples) that the signal attained either
  716. @var{Min level} or @var{Max level}.
  717. @end table
  718. @section astreamsync
  719. Forward two audio streams and control the order the buffers are forwarded.
  720. The filter accepts the following options:
  721. @table @option
  722. @item expr, e
  723. Set the expression deciding which stream should be
  724. forwarded next: if the result is negative, the first stream is forwarded; if
  725. the result is positive or zero, the second stream is forwarded. It can use
  726. the following variables:
  727. @table @var
  728. @item b1 b2
  729. number of buffers forwarded so far on each stream
  730. @item s1 s2
  731. number of samples forwarded so far on each stream
  732. @item t1 t2
  733. current timestamp of each stream
  734. @end table
  735. The default value is @code{t1-t2}, which means to always forward the stream
  736. that has a smaller timestamp.
  737. @end table
  738. @subsection Examples
  739. Stress-test @code{amerge} by randomly sending buffers on the wrong
  740. input, while avoiding too much of a desynchronization:
  741. @example
  742. amovie=file.ogg [a] ; amovie=file.mp3 [b] ;
  743. [a] [b] astreamsync=(2*random(1))-1+tanh(5*(t1-t2)) [a2] [b2] ;
  744. [a2] [b2] amerge
  745. @end example
  746. @section asyncts
  747. Synchronize audio data with timestamps by squeezing/stretching it and/or
  748. dropping samples/adding silence when needed.
  749. This filter is not built by default, please use @ref{aresample} to do squeezing/stretching.
  750. The filter accepts the following named parameters:
  751. @table @option
  752. @item compensate
  753. Enable stretching/squeezing the data to make it match the timestamps. Disabled
  754. by default. When disabled, time gaps are covered with silence.
  755. @item min_delta
  756. Minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in seconds) to trigger
  757. adding/dropping samples. Default value is 0.1. If you get non-perfect sync with
  758. this filter, try setting this parameter to 0.
  759. @item max_comp
  760. Maximum compensation in samples per second. Relevant only with compensate=1.
  761. Default value 500.
  762. @item first_pts
  763. Assume the first pts should be this value. The time base is 1 / sample rate.
  764. This allows for padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no
  765. assumption is made about the first frame's expected pts, so no padding or
  766. trimming is done. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with
  767. silence if an audio stream starts after the video stream or to trim any samples
  768. with a negative pts due to encoder delay.
  769. @end table
  770. @section atempo
  771. Adjust audio tempo.
  772. The filter accepts exactly one parameter, the audio tempo. If not
  773. specified then the filter will assume nominal 1.0 tempo. Tempo must
  774. be in the [0.5, 2.0] range.
  775. @subsection Examples
  776. @itemize
  777. @item
  778. Slow down audio to 80% tempo:
  779. @example
  780. atempo=0.8
  781. @end example
  782. @item
  783. To speed up audio to 125% tempo:
  784. @example
  785. atempo=1.25
  786. @end example
  787. @end itemize
  788. @section atrim
  789. Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
  790. This filter accepts the following options:
  791. @table @option
  792. @item start
  793. Specify time of the start of the kept section, i.e. the audio sample
  794. with the timestamp @var{start} will be the first sample in the output.
  795. @item end
  796. Specify time of the first audio sample that will be dropped, i.e. the
  797. audio sample immediately preceding the one with the timestamp @var{end} will be
  798. the last sample in the output.
  799. @item start_pts
  800. Same as @var{start}, except this option sets the start timestamp in samples
  801. instead of seconds.
  802. @item end_pts
  803. Same as @var{end}, except this option sets the end timestamp in samples instead
  804. of seconds.
  805. @item duration
  806. Specify maximum duration of the output.
  807. @item start_sample
  808. Number of the first sample that should be passed to output.
  809. @item end_sample
  810. Number of the first sample that should be dropped.
  811. @end table
  812. @option{start}, @option{end}, @option{duration} are expressed as time
  813. duration specifications, check the "Time duration" section in the
  814. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  815. Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the @option{duration}
  816. option look at the frame timestamp, while the _sample options simply count the
  817. samples that pass through the filter. So start/end_pts and start/end_sample will
  818. give different results when the timestamps are wrong, inexact or do not start at
  819. zero. Also note that this filter does not modify the timestamps. If you wish
  820. that the output timestamps start at zero, insert the asetpts filter after the
  821. atrim filter.
  822. If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
  823. keep all samples that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
  824. only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple atrim
  825. filters.
  826. The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
  827. just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
  828. Examples:
  829. @itemize
  830. @item
  831. drop everything except the second minute of input
  832. @example
  833. ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=60:120
  834. @end example
  835. @item
  836. keep only the first 1000 samples
  837. @example
  838. ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=end_sample=1000
  839. @end example
  840. @end itemize
  841. @section bandpass
  842. Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-pass filter with central
  843. frequency @var{frequency}, and (3dB-point) band-width width.
  844. The @var{csg} option selects a constant skirt gain (peak gain = Q)
  845. instead of the default: constant 0dB peak gain.
  846. The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
  847. The filter accepts the following options:
  848. @table @option
  849. @item frequency, f
  850. Set the filter's central frequency. Default is @code{3000}.
  851. @item csg
  852. Constant skirt gain if set to 1. Defaults to 0.
  853. @item width_type
  854. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  855. @table @option
  856. @item h
  857. Hz
  858. @item q
  859. Q-Factor
  860. @item o
  861. octave
  862. @item s
  863. slope
  864. @end table
  865. @item width, w
  866. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  867. @end table
  868. @section bandreject
  869. Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-reject filter with central
  870. frequency @var{frequency}, and (3dB-point) band-width @var{width}.
  871. The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
  872. The filter accepts the following options:
  873. @table @option
  874. @item frequency, f
  875. Set the filter's central frequency. Default is @code{3000}.
  876. @item width_type
  877. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  878. @table @option
  879. @item h
  880. Hz
  881. @item q
  882. Q-Factor
  883. @item o
  884. octave
  885. @item s
  886. slope
  887. @end table
  888. @item width, w
  889. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  890. @end table
  891. @section bass
  892. Boost or cut the bass (lower) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
  893. shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
  894. hi-fi's tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
  895. The filter accepts the following options:
  896. @table @option
  897. @item gain, g
  898. Give the gain at 0 Hz. Its useful range is about -20
  899. (for a large cut) to +20 (for a large boost).
  900. Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  901. @item frequency, f
  902. Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used
  903. to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
  904. The default value is @code{100} Hz.
  905. @item width_type
  906. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  907. @table @option
  908. @item h
  909. Hz
  910. @item q
  911. Q-Factor
  912. @item o
  913. octave
  914. @item s
  915. slope
  916. @end table
  917. @item width, w
  918. Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.
  919. @end table
  920. @section biquad
  921. Apply a biquad IIR filter with the given coefficients.
  922. Where @var{b0}, @var{b1}, @var{b2} and @var{a0}, @var{a1}, @var{a2}
  923. are the numerator and denominator coefficients respectively.
  924. @section channelmap
  925. Remap input channels to new locations.
  926. This filter accepts the following named parameters:
  927. @table @option
  928. @item channel_layout
  929. Channel layout of the output stream.
  930. @item map
  931. Map channels from input to output. The argument is a '|'-separated list of
  932. mappings, each in the @code{@var{in_channel}-@var{out_channel}} or
  933. @var{in_channel} form. @var{in_channel} can be either the name of the input
  934. channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its index in the input channel layout.
  935. @var{out_channel} is the name of the output channel or its index in the output
  936. channel layout. If @var{out_channel} is not given then it is implicitly an
  937. index, starting with zero and increasing by one for each mapping.
  938. @end table
  939. If no mapping is present, the filter will implicitly map input channels to
  940. output channels preserving index.
  941. For example, assuming a 5.1+downmix input MOV file
  942. @example
  943. ffmpeg -i in.mov -filter 'channelmap=map=DL-FL|DR-FR' out.wav
  944. @end example
  945. will create an output WAV file tagged as stereo from the downmix channels of
  946. the input.
  947. To fix a 5.1 WAV improperly encoded in AAC's native channel order
  948. @example
  949. ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter 'channelmap=1|2|0|5|3|4:channel_layout=5.1' out.wav
  950. @end example
  951. @section channelsplit
  952. Split each channel in input audio stream into a separate output stream.
  953. This filter accepts the following named parameters:
  954. @table @option
  955. @item channel_layout
  956. Channel layout of the input stream. Default is "stereo".
  957. @end table
  958. For example, assuming a stereo input MP3 file
  959. @example
  960. ffmpeg -i in.mp3 -filter_complex channelsplit out.mkv
  961. @end example
  962. will create an output Matroska file with two audio streams, one containing only
  963. the left channel and the other the right channel.
  964. To split a 5.1 WAV file into per-channel files
  965. @example
  966. ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter_complex
  967. 'channelsplit=channel_layout=5.1[FL][FR][FC][LFE][SL][SR]'
  968. -map '[FL]' front_left.wav -map '[FR]' front_right.wav -map '[FC]'
  969. front_center.wav -map '[LFE]' lfe.wav -map '[SL]' side_left.wav -map '[SR]'
  970. side_right.wav
  971. @end example
  972. @section compand
  973. Compress or expand audio dynamic range.
  974. A description of the accepted options follows.
  975. @table @option
  976. @item attacks
  977. @item decays
  978. Set list of times in seconds for each channel over which the instantaneous level
  979. of the input signal is averaged to determine its volume. @var{attacks} refers to
  980. increase of volume and @var{decays} refers to decrease of volume. For most
  981. situations, the attack time (response to the audio getting louder) should be
  982. shorter than the decay time because the human ear is more sensitive to sudden
  983. loud audio than sudden soft audio. A typical value for attack is 0.3 seconds and
  984. a typical value for decay is 0.8 seconds.
  985. @item points
  986. Set list of points for the transfer function, specified in dB relative to the
  987. maximum possible signal amplitude. Each key points list must be defined using
  988. the following syntax: @code{x0/y0|x1/y1|x2/y2|....} or
  989. @code{x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ....}
  990. The input values must be in strictly increasing order but the transfer function
  991. does not have to be monotonically rising. The point @code{0/0} is assumed but
  992. may be overridden (by @code{0/out-dBn}). Typical values for the transfer
  993. function are @code{-70/-70|-60/-20}.
  994. @item soft-knee
  995. Set the curve radius in dB for all joints. Defaults to 0.01.
  996. @item gain
  997. Set additional gain in dB to be applied at all points on the transfer function.
  998. This allows easy adjustment of the overall gain. Defaults to 0.
  999. @item volume
  1000. Set initial volume in dB to be assumed for each channel when filtering starts.
  1001. This permits the user to supply a nominal level initially, so that, for
  1002. example, a very large gain is not applied to initial signal levels before the
  1003. companding has begun to operate. A typical value for audio which is initially
  1004. quiet is -90 dB. Defaults to 0.
  1005. @item delay
  1006. Set delay in seconds. The input audio is analyzed immediately, but audio is
  1007. delayed before being fed to the volume adjuster. Specifying a delay
  1008. approximately equal to the attack/decay times allows the filter to effectively
  1009. operate in predictive rather than reactive mode. Defaults to 0.
  1010. @end table
  1011. @subsection Examples
  1012. @itemize
  1013. @item
  1014. Make music with both quiet and loud passages suitable for listening in a noisy
  1015. environment:
  1016. @example
  1017. compand=.3|.3:1|1:-90/-60|-60/-40|-40/-30|-20/-20:6:0:-90:0.2
  1018. @end example
  1019. @item
  1020. Noise gate for when the noise is at a lower level than the signal:
  1021. @example
  1022. compand=.1|.1:.2|.2:-900/-900|-50.1/-900|-50/-50:.01:0:-90:.1
  1023. @end example
  1024. @item
  1025. Here is another noise gate, this time for when the noise is at a higher level
  1026. than the signal (making it, in some ways, similar to squelch):
  1027. @example
  1028. compand=.1|.1:.1|.1:-45.1/-45.1|-45/-900|0/-900:.01:45:-90:.1
  1029. @end example
  1030. @end itemize
  1031. @section earwax
  1032. Make audio easier to listen to on headphones.
  1033. This filter adds `cues' to 44.1kHz stereo (i.e. audio CD format) audio
  1034. so that when listened to on headphones the stereo image is moved from
  1035. inside your head (standard for headphones) to outside and in front of
  1036. the listener (standard for speakers).
  1037. Ported from SoX.
  1038. @section equalizer
  1039. Apply a two-pole peaking equalisation (EQ) filter. With this
  1040. filter, the signal-level at and around a selected frequency can
  1041. be increased or decreased, whilst (unlike bandpass and bandreject
  1042. filters) that at all other frequencies is unchanged.
  1043. In order to produce complex equalisation curves, this filter can
  1044. be given several times, each with a different central frequency.
  1045. The filter accepts the following options:
  1046. @table @option
  1047. @item frequency, f
  1048. Set the filter's central frequency in Hz.
  1049. @item width_type
  1050. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1051. @table @option
  1052. @item h
  1053. Hz
  1054. @item q
  1055. Q-Factor
  1056. @item o
  1057. octave
  1058. @item s
  1059. slope
  1060. @end table
  1061. @item width, w
  1062. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1063. @item gain, g
  1064. Set the required gain or attenuation in dB.
  1065. Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  1066. @end table
  1067. @subsection Examples
  1068. @itemize
  1069. @item
  1070. Attenuate 10 dB at 1000 Hz, with a bandwidth of 200 Hz:
  1071. @example
  1072. equalizer=f=1000:width_type=h:width=200:g=-10
  1073. @end example
  1074. @item
  1075. Apply 2 dB gain at 1000 Hz with Q 1 and attenuate 5 dB at 100 Hz with Q 2:
  1076. @example
  1077. equalizer=f=1000:width_type=q:width=1:g=2,equalizer=f=100:width_type=q:width=2:g=-5
  1078. @end example
  1079. @end itemize
  1080. @section highpass
  1081. Apply a high-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
  1082. The filter can be either single-pole, or double-pole (the default).
  1083. The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
  1084. The filter accepts the following options:
  1085. @table @option
  1086. @item frequency, f
  1087. Set frequency in Hz. Default is 3000.
  1088. @item poles, p
  1089. Set number of poles. Default is 2.
  1090. @item width_type
  1091. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1092. @table @option
  1093. @item h
  1094. Hz
  1095. @item q
  1096. Q-Factor
  1097. @item o
  1098. octave
  1099. @item s
  1100. slope
  1101. @end table
  1102. @item width, w
  1103. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1104. Applies only to double-pole filter.
  1105. The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
  1106. @end table
  1107. @section join
  1108. Join multiple input streams into one multi-channel stream.
  1109. The filter accepts the following named parameters:
  1110. @table @option
  1111. @item inputs
  1112. Number of input streams. Defaults to 2.
  1113. @item channel_layout
  1114. Desired output channel layout. Defaults to stereo.
  1115. @item map
  1116. Map channels from inputs to output. The argument is a '|'-separated list of
  1117. mappings, each in the @code{@var{input_idx}.@var{in_channel}-@var{out_channel}}
  1118. form. @var{input_idx} is the 0-based index of the input stream. @var{in_channel}
  1119. can be either the name of the input channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its
  1120. index in the specified input stream. @var{out_channel} is the name of the output
  1121. channel.
  1122. @end table
  1123. The filter will attempt to guess the mappings when those are not specified
  1124. explicitly. It does so by first trying to find an unused matching input channel
  1125. and if that fails it picks the first unused input channel.
  1126. E.g. to join 3 inputs (with properly set channel layouts)
  1127. @example
  1128. ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex join=inputs=3 OUTPUT
  1129. @end example
  1130. To build a 5.1 output from 6 single-channel streams:
  1131. @example
  1132. ffmpeg -i fl -i fr -i fc -i sl -i sr -i lfe -filter_complex
  1133. 'join=inputs=6:channel_layout=5.1:map=0.0-FL|1.0-FR|2.0-FC|3.0-SL|4.0-SR|5.0-LFE'
  1134. out
  1135. @end example
  1136. @section ladspa
  1137. Load a LADSPA (Linux Audio Developer's Simple Plugin API) plugin.
  1138. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  1139. @code{--enable-ladspa}.
  1140. @table @option
  1141. @item file, f
  1142. Specifies the name of LADSPA plugin library to load. If the environment
  1143. variable @env{LADSPA_PATH} is defined, the LADSPA plugin is searched in
  1144. each one of the directories specified by the colon separated list in
  1145. @env{LADSPA_PATH}, otherwise in the standard LADSPA paths, which are in
  1146. this order: @file{HOME/.ladspa/lib/}, @file{/usr/local/lib/ladspa/},
  1147. @file{/usr/lib/ladspa/}.
  1148. @item plugin, p
  1149. Specifies the plugin within the library. Some libraries contain only
  1150. one plugin, but others contain many of them. If this is not set filter
  1151. will list all available plugins within the specified library.
  1152. @item controls, c
  1153. Set the '|' separated list of controls which are zero or more floating point
  1154. values that determine the behavior of the loaded plugin (for example delay,
  1155. threshold or gain).
  1156. Controls need to be defined using the following syntax:
  1157. c0=@var{value0}|c1=@var{value1}|c2=@var{value2}|..., where
  1158. @var{valuei} is the value set on the @var{i}-th control.
  1159. If @option{controls} is set to @code{help}, all available controls and
  1160. their valid ranges are printed.
  1161. @item sample_rate, s
  1162. Specify the sample rate, default to 44100. Only used if plugin have
  1163. zero inputs.
  1164. @item nb_samples, n
  1165. Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame, default
  1166. is 1024. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
  1167. @item duration, d
  1168. Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See the function
  1169. @code{av_parse_time()} for the accepted format, also check the "Time duration"
  1170. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  1171. Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified duration,
  1172. as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a complete frame.
  1173. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
  1174. supposed to be generated forever.
  1175. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
  1176. @end table
  1177. @subsection Examples
  1178. @itemize
  1179. @item
  1180. List all available plugins within amp (LADSPA example plugin) library:
  1181. @example
  1182. ladspa=file=amp
  1183. @end example
  1184. @item
  1185. List all available controls and their valid ranges for @code{vcf_notch}
  1186. plugin from @code{VCF} library:
  1187. @example
  1188. ladspa=f=vcf:p=vcf_notch:c=help
  1189. @end example
  1190. @item
  1191. Simulate low quality audio equipment using @code{Computer Music Toolkit} (CMT)
  1192. plugin library:
  1193. @example
  1194. ladspa=file=cmt:plugin=lofi:controls=c0=22|c1=12|c2=12
  1195. @end example
  1196. @item
  1197. Add reverberation to the audio using TAP-plugins
  1198. (Tom's Audio Processing plugins):
  1199. @example
  1200. ladspa=file=tap_reverb:tap_reverb
  1201. @end example
  1202. @item
  1203. Generate white noise, with 0.2 amplitude:
  1204. @example
  1205. ladspa=file=cmt:noise_source_white:c=c0=.2
  1206. @end example
  1207. @item
  1208. Generate 20 bpm clicks using plugin @code{C* Click - Metronome} from the
  1209. @code{C* Audio Plugin Suite} (CAPS) library:
  1210. @example
  1211. ladspa=file=caps:Click:c=c1=20'
  1212. @end example
  1213. @item
  1214. Apply @code{C* Eq10X2 - Stereo 10-band equaliser} effect:
  1215. @example
  1216. ladspa=caps:Eq10X2:c=c0=-48|c9=-24|c3=12|c4=2
  1217. @end example
  1218. @end itemize
  1219. @subsection Commands
  1220. This filter supports the following commands:
  1221. @table @option
  1222. @item cN
  1223. Modify the @var{N}-th control value.
  1224. If the specified value is not valid, it is ignored and prior one is kept.
  1225. @end table
  1226. @section lowpass
  1227. Apply a low-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
  1228. The filter can be either single-pole or double-pole (the default).
  1229. The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
  1230. The filter accepts the following options:
  1231. @table @option
  1232. @item frequency, f
  1233. Set frequency in Hz. Default is 500.
  1234. @item poles, p
  1235. Set number of poles. Default is 2.
  1236. @item width_type
  1237. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1238. @table @option
  1239. @item h
  1240. Hz
  1241. @item q
  1242. Q-Factor
  1243. @item o
  1244. octave
  1245. @item s
  1246. slope
  1247. @end table
  1248. @item width, w
  1249. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1250. Applies only to double-pole filter.
  1251. The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
  1252. @end table
  1253. @section pan
  1254. Mix channels with specific gain levels. The filter accepts the output
  1255. channel layout followed by a set of channels definitions.
  1256. This filter is also designed to remap efficiently the channels of an audio
  1257. stream.
  1258. The filter accepts parameters of the form:
  1259. "@var{l}:@var{outdef}:@var{outdef}:..."
  1260. @table @option
  1261. @item l
  1262. output channel layout or number of channels
  1263. @item outdef
  1264. output channel specification, of the form:
  1265. "@var{out_name}=[@var{gain}*]@var{in_name}[+[@var{gain}*]@var{in_name}...]"
  1266. @item out_name
  1267. output channel to define, either a channel name (FL, FR, etc.) or a channel
  1268. number (c0, c1, etc.)
  1269. @item gain
  1270. multiplicative coefficient for the channel, 1 leaving the volume unchanged
  1271. @item in_name
  1272. input channel to use, see out_name for details; it is not possible to mix
  1273. named and numbered input channels
  1274. @end table
  1275. If the `=' in a channel specification is replaced by `<', then the gains for
  1276. that specification will be renormalized so that the total is 1, thus
  1277. avoiding clipping noise.
  1278. @subsection Mixing examples
  1279. For example, if you want to down-mix from stereo to mono, but with a bigger
  1280. factor for the left channel:
  1281. @example
  1282. pan=1:c0=0.9*c0+0.1*c1
  1283. @end example
  1284. A customized down-mix to stereo that works automatically for 3-, 4-, 5- and
  1285. 7-channels surround:
  1286. @example
  1287. pan=stereo: FL < FL + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BL + 0.6*SL : FR < FR + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BR + 0.6*SR
  1288. @end example
  1289. Note that @command{ffmpeg} integrates a default down-mix (and up-mix) system
  1290. that should be preferred (see "-ac" option) unless you have very specific
  1291. needs.
  1292. @subsection Remapping examples
  1293. The channel remapping will be effective if, and only if:
  1294. @itemize
  1295. @item gain coefficients are zeroes or ones,
  1296. @item only one input per channel output,
  1297. @end itemize
  1298. If all these conditions are satisfied, the filter will notify the user ("Pure
  1299. channel mapping detected"), and use an optimized and lossless method to do the
  1300. remapping.
  1301. For example, if you have a 5.1 source and want a stereo audio stream by
  1302. dropping the extra channels:
  1303. @example
  1304. pan="stereo: c0=FL : c1=FR"
  1305. @end example
  1306. Given the same source, you can also switch front left and front right channels
  1307. and keep the input channel layout:
  1308. @example
  1309. pan="5.1: c0=c1 : c1=c0 : c2=c2 : c3=c3 : c4=c4 : c5=c5"
  1310. @end example
  1311. If the input is a stereo audio stream, you can mute the front left channel (and
  1312. still keep the stereo channel layout) with:
  1313. @example
  1314. pan="stereo:c1=c1"
  1315. @end example
  1316. Still with a stereo audio stream input, you can copy the right channel in both
  1317. front left and right:
  1318. @example
  1319. pan="stereo: c0=FR : c1=FR"
  1320. @end example
  1321. @section replaygain
  1322. ReplayGain scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as an input and
  1323. outputs it unchanged.
  1324. At end of filtering it displays @code{track_gain} and @code{track_peak}.
  1325. @section resample
  1326. Convert the audio sample format, sample rate and channel layout. This filter is
  1327. not meant to be used directly.
  1328. @section silencedetect
  1329. Detect silence in an audio stream.
  1330. This filter logs a message when it detects that the input audio volume is less
  1331. or equal to a noise tolerance value for a duration greater or equal to the
  1332. minimum detected noise duration.
  1333. The printed times and duration are expressed in seconds.
  1334. The filter accepts the following options:
  1335. @table @option
  1336. @item duration, d
  1337. Set silence duration until notification (default is 2 seconds).
  1338. @item noise, n
  1339. Set noise tolerance. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the
  1340. specified value) or amplitude ratio. Default is -60dB, or 0.001.
  1341. @end table
  1342. @subsection Examples
  1343. @itemize
  1344. @item
  1345. Detect 5 seconds of silence with -50dB noise tolerance:
  1346. @example
  1347. silencedetect=n=-50dB:d=5
  1348. @end example
  1349. @item
  1350. Complete example with @command{ffmpeg} to detect silence with 0.0001 noise
  1351. tolerance in @file{silence.mp3}:
  1352. @example
  1353. ffmpeg -i silence.mp3 -af silencedetect=noise=0.0001 -f null -
  1354. @end example
  1355. @end itemize
  1356. @section treble
  1357. Boost or cut treble (upper) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
  1358. shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
  1359. hi-fi's tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
  1360. The filter accepts the following options:
  1361. @table @option
  1362. @item gain, g
  1363. Give the gain at whichever is the lower of ~22 kHz and the
  1364. Nyquist frequency. Its useful range is about -20 (for a large cut)
  1365. to +20 (for a large boost). Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  1366. @item frequency, f
  1367. Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used
  1368. to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
  1369. The default value is @code{3000} Hz.
  1370. @item width_type
  1371. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1372. @table @option
  1373. @item h
  1374. Hz
  1375. @item q
  1376. Q-Factor
  1377. @item o
  1378. octave
  1379. @item s
  1380. slope
  1381. @end table
  1382. @item width, w
  1383. Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.
  1384. @end table
  1385. @section volume
  1386. Adjust the input audio volume.
  1387. The filter accepts the following options:
  1388. @table @option
  1389. @item volume
  1390. Set audio volume expression.
  1391. Output values are clipped to the maximum value.
  1392. The output audio volume is given by the relation:
  1393. @example
  1394. @var{output_volume} = @var{volume} * @var{input_volume}
  1395. @end example
  1396. Default value for @var{volume} is "1.0".
  1397. @item precision
  1398. Set the mathematical precision.
  1399. This determines which input sample formats will be allowed, which affects the
  1400. precision of the volume scaling.
  1401. @table @option
  1402. @item fixed
  1403. 8-bit fixed-point; limits input sample format to U8, S16, and S32.
  1404. @item float
  1405. 32-bit floating-point; limits input sample format to FLT. (default)
  1406. @item double
  1407. 64-bit floating-point; limits input sample format to DBL.
  1408. @end table
  1409. @item eval
  1410. Set when the volume expression is evaluated.
  1411. It accepts the following values:
  1412. @table @samp
  1413. @item once
  1414. only evaluate expression once during the filter initialization, or
  1415. when the @samp{volume} command is sent
  1416. @item frame
  1417. evaluate expression for each incoming frame
  1418. @end table
  1419. Default value is @samp{once}.
  1420. @end table
  1421. The volume expression can contain the following parameters.
  1422. @table @option
  1423. @item n
  1424. frame number (starting at zero)
  1425. @item nb_channels
  1426. number of channels
  1427. @item nb_consumed_samples
  1428. number of samples consumed by the filter
  1429. @item nb_samples
  1430. number of samples in the current frame
  1431. @item pos
  1432. original frame position in the file
  1433. @item pts
  1434. frame PTS
  1435. @item sample_rate
  1436. sample rate
  1437. @item startpts
  1438. PTS at start of stream
  1439. @item startt
  1440. time at start of stream
  1441. @item t
  1442. frame time
  1443. @item tb
  1444. timestamp timebase
  1445. @item volume
  1446. last set volume value
  1447. @end table
  1448. Note that when @option{eval} is set to @samp{once} only the
  1449. @var{sample_rate} and @var{tb} variables are available, all other
  1450. variables will evaluate to NAN.
  1451. @subsection Commands
  1452. This filter supports the following commands:
  1453. @table @option
  1454. @item volume
  1455. Modify the volume expression.
  1456. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  1457. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  1458. value.
  1459. @end table
  1460. @subsection Examples
  1461. @itemize
  1462. @item
  1463. Halve the input audio volume:
  1464. @example
  1465. volume=volume=0.5
  1466. volume=volume=1/2
  1467. volume=volume=-6.0206dB
  1468. @end example
  1469. In all the above example the named key for @option{volume} can be
  1470. omitted, for example like in:
  1471. @example
  1472. volume=0.5
  1473. @end example
  1474. @item
  1475. Increase input audio power by 6 decibels using fixed-point precision:
  1476. @example
  1477. volume=volume=6dB:precision=fixed
  1478. @end example
  1479. @item
  1480. Fade volume after time 10 with an annihilation period of 5 seconds:
  1481. @example
  1482. volume='if(lt(t,10),1,max(1-(t-10)/5,0))':eval=frame
  1483. @end example
  1484. @end itemize
  1485. @section volumedetect
  1486. Detect the volume of the input video.
  1487. The filter has no parameters. The input is not modified. Statistics about
  1488. the volume will be printed in the log when the input stream end is reached.
  1489. In particular it will show the mean volume (root mean square), maximum
  1490. volume (on a per-sample basis), and the beginning of a histogram of the
  1491. registered volume values (from the maximum value to a cumulated 1/1000 of
  1492. the samples).
  1493. All volumes are in decibels relative to the maximum PCM value.
  1494. @subsection Examples
  1495. Here is an excerpt of the output:
  1496. @example
  1497. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] mean_volume: -27 dB
  1498. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] max_volume: -4 dB
  1499. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_4db: 6
  1500. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_5db: 62
  1501. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_6db: 286
  1502. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_7db: 1042
  1503. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_8db: 2551
  1504. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_9db: 4609
  1505. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_10db: 8409
  1506. @end example
  1507. It means that:
  1508. @itemize
  1509. @item
  1510. The mean square energy is approximately -27 dB, or 10^-2.7.
  1511. @item
  1512. The largest sample is at -4 dB, or more precisely between -4 dB and -5 dB.
  1513. @item
  1514. There are 6 samples at -4 dB, 62 at -5 dB, 286 at -6 dB, etc.
  1515. @end itemize
  1516. In other words, raising the volume by +4 dB does not cause any clipping,
  1517. raising it by +5 dB causes clipping for 6 samples, etc.
  1518. @c man end AUDIO FILTERS
  1519. @chapter Audio Sources
  1520. @c man begin AUDIO SOURCES
  1521. Below is a description of the currently available audio sources.
  1522. @section abuffer
  1523. Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
  1524. This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
  1525. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/asrc_abuffer.h}.
  1526. It accepts the following named parameters:
  1527. @table @option
  1528. @item time_base
  1529. Timebase which will be used for timestamps of submitted frames. It must be
  1530. either a floating-point number or in @var{numerator}/@var{denominator} form.
  1531. @item sample_rate
  1532. The sample rate of the incoming audio buffers.
  1533. @item sample_fmt
  1534. The sample format of the incoming audio buffers.
  1535. Either a sample format name or its corresponging integer representation from
  1536. the enum AVSampleFormat in @file{libavutil/samplefmt.h}
  1537. @item channel_layout
  1538. The channel layout of the incoming audio buffers.
  1539. Either a channel layout name from channel_layout_map in
  1540. @file{libavutil/channel_layout.c} or its corresponding integer representation
  1541. from the AV_CH_LAYOUT_* macros in @file{libavutil/channel_layout.h}
  1542. @item channels
  1543. The number of channels of the incoming audio buffers.
  1544. If both @var{channels} and @var{channel_layout} are specified, then they
  1545. must be consistent.
  1546. @end table
  1547. @subsection Examples
  1548. @example
  1549. abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=s16p:channel_layout=stereo
  1550. @end example
  1551. will instruct the source to accept planar 16bit signed stereo at 44100Hz.
  1552. Since the sample format with name "s16p" corresponds to the number
  1553. 6 and the "stereo" channel layout corresponds to the value 0x3, this is
  1554. equivalent to:
  1555. @example
  1556. abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=6:channel_layout=0x3
  1557. @end example
  1558. @section aevalsrc
  1559. Generate an audio signal specified by an expression.
  1560. This source accepts in input one or more expressions (one for each
  1561. channel), which are evaluated and used to generate a corresponding
  1562. audio signal.
  1563. This source accepts the following options:
  1564. @table @option
  1565. @item exprs
  1566. Set the '|'-separated expressions list for each separate channel. In case the
  1567. @option{channel_layout} option is not specified, the selected channel layout
  1568. depends on the number of provided expressions. Otherwise the last
  1569. specified expression is applied to the remaining output channels.
  1570. @item channel_layout, c
  1571. Set the channel layout. The number of channels in the specified layout
  1572. must be equal to the number of specified expressions.
  1573. @item duration, d
  1574. Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See the function
  1575. @code{av_parse_time()} for the accepted format.
  1576. Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified
  1577. duration, as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a
  1578. complete frame.
  1579. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
  1580. supposed to be generated forever.
  1581. @item nb_samples, n
  1582. Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame,
  1583. default to 1024.
  1584. @item sample_rate, s
  1585. Specify the sample rate, default to 44100.
  1586. @end table
  1587. Each expression in @var{exprs} can contain the following constants:
  1588. @table @option
  1589. @item n
  1590. number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
  1591. @item t
  1592. time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds, starting from 0
  1593. @item s
  1594. sample rate
  1595. @end table
  1596. @subsection Examples
  1597. @itemize
  1598. @item
  1599. Generate silence:
  1600. @example
  1601. aevalsrc=0
  1602. @end example
  1603. @item
  1604. Generate a sin signal with frequency of 440 Hz, set sample rate to
  1605. 8000 Hz:
  1606. @example
  1607. aevalsrc="sin(440*2*PI*t):s=8000"
  1608. @end example
  1609. @item
  1610. Generate a two channels signal, specify the channel layout (Front
  1611. Center + Back Center) explicitly:
  1612. @example
  1613. aevalsrc="sin(420*2*PI*t)|cos(430*2*PI*t):c=FC|BC"
  1614. @end example
  1615. @item
  1616. Generate white noise:
  1617. @example
  1618. aevalsrc="-2+random(0)"
  1619. @end example
  1620. @item
  1621. Generate an amplitude modulated signal:
  1622. @example
  1623. aevalsrc="sin(10*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t)"
  1624. @end example
  1625. @item
  1626. Generate 2.5 Hz binaural beats on a 360 Hz carrier:
  1627. @example
  1628. aevalsrc="0.1*sin(2*PI*(360-2.5/2)*t) | 0.1*sin(2*PI*(360+2.5/2)*t)"
  1629. @end example
  1630. @end itemize
  1631. @section anullsrc
  1632. Null audio source, return unprocessed audio frames. It is mainly useful
  1633. as a template and to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as
  1634. the source for filters which ignore the input data (for example the sox
  1635. synth filter).
  1636. This source accepts the following options:
  1637. @table @option
  1638. @item channel_layout, cl
  1639. Specify the channel layout, and can be either an integer or a string
  1640. representing a channel layout. The default value of @var{channel_layout}
  1641. is "stereo".
  1642. Check the channel_layout_map definition in
  1643. @file{libavutil/channel_layout.c} for the mapping between strings and
  1644. channel layout values.
  1645. @item sample_rate, r
  1646. Specify the sample rate, and defaults to 44100.
  1647. @item nb_samples, n
  1648. Set the number of samples per requested frames.
  1649. @end table
  1650. @subsection Examples
  1651. @itemize
  1652. @item
  1653. Set the sample rate to 48000 Hz and the channel layout to AV_CH_LAYOUT_MONO.
  1654. @example
  1655. anullsrc=r=48000:cl=4
  1656. @end example
  1657. @item
  1658. Do the same operation with a more obvious syntax:
  1659. @example
  1660. anullsrc=r=48000:cl=mono
  1661. @end example
  1662. @end itemize
  1663. All the parameters need to be explicitly defined.
  1664. @section flite
  1665. Synthesize a voice utterance using the libflite library.
  1666. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  1667. @code{--enable-libflite}.
  1668. Note that the flite library is not thread-safe.
  1669. The filter accepts the following options:
  1670. @table @option
  1671. @item list_voices
  1672. If set to 1, list the names of the available voices and exit
  1673. immediately. Default value is 0.
  1674. @item nb_samples, n
  1675. Set the maximum number of samples per frame. Default value is 512.
  1676. @item textfile
  1677. Set the filename containing the text to speak.
  1678. @item text
  1679. Set the text to speak.
  1680. @item voice, v
  1681. Set the voice to use for the speech synthesis. Default value is
  1682. @code{kal}. See also the @var{list_voices} option.
  1683. @end table
  1684. @subsection Examples
  1685. @itemize
  1686. @item
  1687. Read from file @file{speech.txt}, and synthetize the text using the
  1688. standard flite voice:
  1689. @example
  1690. flite=textfile=speech.txt
  1691. @end example
  1692. @item
  1693. Read the specified text selecting the @code{slt} voice:
  1694. @example
  1695. flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
  1696. @end example
  1697. @item
  1698. Input text to ffmpeg:
  1699. @example
  1700. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
  1701. @end example
  1702. @item
  1703. Make @file{ffplay} speak the specified text, using @code{flite} and
  1704. the @code{lavfi} device:
  1705. @example
  1706. ffplay -f lavfi flite=text='No more be grieved for which that thou hast done.'
  1707. @end example
  1708. @end itemize
  1709. For more information about libflite, check:
  1710. @url{http://www.speech.cs.cmu.edu/flite/}
  1711. @section sine
  1712. Generate an audio signal made of a sine wave with amplitude 1/8.
  1713. The audio signal is bit-exact.
  1714. The filter accepts the following options:
  1715. @table @option
  1716. @item frequency, f
  1717. Set the carrier frequency. Default is 440 Hz.
  1718. @item beep_factor, b
  1719. Enable a periodic beep every second with frequency @var{beep_factor} times
  1720. the carrier frequency. Default is 0, meaning the beep is disabled.
  1721. @item sample_rate, r
  1722. Specify the sample rate, default is 44100.
  1723. @item duration, d
  1724. Specify the duration of the generated audio stream.
  1725. @item samples_per_frame
  1726. Set the number of samples per output frame, default is 1024.
  1727. @end table
  1728. @subsection Examples
  1729. @itemize
  1730. @item
  1731. Generate a simple 440 Hz sine wave:
  1732. @example
  1733. sine
  1734. @end example
  1735. @item
  1736. Generate a 220 Hz sine wave with a 880 Hz beep each second, for 5 seconds:
  1737. @example
  1738. sine=220:4:d=5
  1739. sine=f=220:b=4:d=5
  1740. sine=frequency=220:beep_factor=4:duration=5
  1741. @end example
  1742. @end itemize
  1743. @c man end AUDIO SOURCES
  1744. @chapter Audio Sinks
  1745. @c man begin AUDIO SINKS
  1746. Below is a description of the currently available audio sinks.
  1747. @section abuffersink
  1748. Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the end of filter chain.
  1749. This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
  1750. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/buffersink.h}
  1751. or the options system.
  1752. It accepts a pointer to an AVABufferSinkContext structure, which
  1753. defines the incoming buffers' formats, to be passed as the opaque
  1754. parameter to @code{avfilter_init_filter} for initialization.
  1755. @section anullsink
  1756. Null audio sink, do absolutely nothing with the input audio. It is
  1757. mainly useful as a template and to be employed in analysis / debugging
  1758. tools.
  1759. @c man end AUDIO SINKS
  1760. @chapter Video Filters
  1761. @c man begin VIDEO FILTERS
  1762. When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
  1763. existing filters using @code{--disable-filters}.
  1764. The configure output will show the video filters included in your
  1765. build.
  1766. Below is a description of the currently available video filters.
  1767. @section alphaextract
  1768. Extract the alpha component from the input as a grayscale video. This
  1769. is especially useful with the @var{alphamerge} filter.
  1770. @section alphamerge
  1771. Add or replace the alpha component of the primary input with the
  1772. grayscale value of a second input. This is intended for use with
  1773. @var{alphaextract} to allow the transmission or storage of frame
  1774. sequences that have alpha in a format that doesn't support an alpha
  1775. channel.
  1776. For example, to reconstruct full frames from a normal YUV-encoded video
  1777. and a separate video created with @var{alphaextract}, you might use:
  1778. @example
  1779. movie=in_alpha.mkv [alpha]; [in][alpha] alphamerge [out]
  1780. @end example
  1781. Since this filter is designed for reconstruction, it operates on frame
  1782. sequences without considering timestamps, and terminates when either
  1783. input reaches end of stream. This will cause problems if your encoding
  1784. pipeline drops frames. If you're trying to apply an image as an
  1785. overlay to a video stream, consider the @var{overlay} filter instead.
  1786. @section ass
  1787. Same as the @ref{subtitles} filter, except that it doesn't require libavcodec
  1788. and libavformat to work. On the other hand, it is limited to ASS (Advanced
  1789. Substation Alpha) subtitles files.
  1790. @section bbox
  1791. Compute the bounding box for the non-black pixels in the input frame
  1792. luminance plane.
  1793. This filter computes the bounding box containing all the pixels with a
  1794. luminance value greater than the minimum allowed value.
  1795. The parameters describing the bounding box are printed on the filter
  1796. log.
  1797. The filter accepts the following option:
  1798. @table @option
  1799. @item min_val
  1800. Set the minimal luminance value. Default is @code{16}.
  1801. @end table
  1802. @section blackdetect
  1803. Detect video intervals that are (almost) completely black. Can be
  1804. useful to detect chapter transitions, commercials, or invalid
  1805. recordings. Output lines contains the time for the start, end and
  1806. duration of the detected black interval expressed in seconds.
  1807. In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
  1808. least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
  1809. The filter accepts the following options:
  1810. @table @option
  1811. @item black_min_duration, d
  1812. Set the minimum detected black duration expressed in seconds. It must
  1813. be a non-negative floating point number.
  1814. Default value is 2.0.
  1815. @item picture_black_ratio_th, pic_th
  1816. Set the threshold for considering a picture "black".
  1817. Express the minimum value for the ratio:
  1818. @example
  1819. @var{nb_black_pixels} / @var{nb_pixels}
  1820. @end example
  1821. for which a picture is considered black.
  1822. Default value is 0.98.
  1823. @item pixel_black_th, pix_th
  1824. Set the threshold for considering a pixel "black".
  1825. The threshold expresses the maximum pixel luminance value for which a
  1826. pixel is considered "black". The provided value is scaled according to
  1827. the following equation:
  1828. @example
  1829. @var{absolute_threshold} = @var{luminance_minimum_value} + @var{pixel_black_th} * @var{luminance_range_size}
  1830. @end example
  1831. @var{luminance_range_size} and @var{luminance_minimum_value} depend on
  1832. the input video format, the range is [0-255] for YUV full-range
  1833. formats and [16-235] for YUV non full-range formats.
  1834. Default value is 0.10.
  1835. @end table
  1836. The following example sets the maximum pixel threshold to the minimum
  1837. value, and detects only black intervals of 2 or more seconds:
  1838. @example
  1839. blackdetect=d=2:pix_th=0.00
  1840. @end example
  1841. @section blackframe
  1842. Detect frames that are (almost) completely black. Can be useful to
  1843. detect chapter transitions or commercials. Output lines consist of
  1844. the frame number of the detected frame, the percentage of blackness,
  1845. the position in the file if known or -1 and the timestamp in seconds.
  1846. In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
  1847. least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
  1848. The filter accepts the following options:
  1849. @table @option
  1850. @item amount
  1851. Set the percentage of the pixels that have to be below the threshold, defaults
  1852. to @code{98}.
  1853. @item threshold, thresh
  1854. Set the threshold below which a pixel value is considered black, defaults to
  1855. @code{32}.
  1856. @end table
  1857. @section blend
  1858. Blend two video frames into each other.
  1859. It takes two input streams and outputs one stream, the first input is the
  1860. "top" layer and second input is "bottom" layer.
  1861. Output terminates when shortest input terminates.
  1862. A description of the accepted options follows.
  1863. @table @option
  1864. @item c0_mode
  1865. @item c1_mode
  1866. @item c2_mode
  1867. @item c3_mode
  1868. @item all_mode
  1869. Set blend mode for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  1870. of @var{all_mode}. Default value is @code{normal}.
  1871. Available values for component modes are:
  1872. @table @samp
  1873. @item addition
  1874. @item and
  1875. @item average
  1876. @item burn
  1877. @item darken
  1878. @item difference
  1879. @item divide
  1880. @item dodge
  1881. @item exclusion
  1882. @item hardlight
  1883. @item lighten
  1884. @item multiply
  1885. @item negation
  1886. @item normal
  1887. @item or
  1888. @item overlay
  1889. @item phoenix
  1890. @item pinlight
  1891. @item reflect
  1892. @item screen
  1893. @item softlight
  1894. @item subtract
  1895. @item vividlight
  1896. @item xor
  1897. @end table
  1898. @item c0_opacity
  1899. @item c1_opacity
  1900. @item c2_opacity
  1901. @item c3_opacity
  1902. @item all_opacity
  1903. Set blend opacity for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  1904. of @var{all_opacity}. Only used in combination with pixel component blend modes.
  1905. @item c0_expr
  1906. @item c1_expr
  1907. @item c2_expr
  1908. @item c3_expr
  1909. @item all_expr
  1910. Set blend expression for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  1911. of @var{all_expr}. Note that related mode options will be ignored if those are set.
  1912. The expressions can use the following variables:
  1913. @table @option
  1914. @item N
  1915. The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from @code{0}.
  1916. @item X
  1917. @item Y
  1918. the coordinates of the current sample
  1919. @item W
  1920. @item H
  1921. the width and height of currently filtered plane
  1922. @item SW
  1923. @item SH
  1924. Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
  1925. ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
  1926. plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are @code{1,1} for the luma plane, and
  1927. @code{0.5,0.5} for chroma planes.
  1928. @item T
  1929. Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
  1930. @item TOP, A
  1931. Value of pixel component at current location for first video frame (top layer).
  1932. @item BOTTOM, B
  1933. Value of pixel component at current location for second video frame (bottom layer).
  1934. @end table
  1935. @item shortest
  1936. Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is @code{0}.
  1937. @item repeatlast
  1938. Continue applying the last bottom frame after the end of the stream. A value of
  1939. @code{0} disable the filter after the last frame of the bottom layer is reached.
  1940. Default is @code{1}.
  1941. @end table
  1942. @subsection Examples
  1943. @itemize
  1944. @item
  1945. Apply transition from bottom layer to top layer in first 10 seconds:
  1946. @example
  1947. blend=all_expr='A*(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10))+B*(1-(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10)))'
  1948. @end example
  1949. @item
  1950. Apply 1x1 checkerboard effect:
  1951. @example
  1952. blend=all_expr='if(eq(mod(X,2),mod(Y,2)),A,B)'
  1953. @end example
  1954. @item
  1955. Apply uncover left effect:
  1956. @example
  1957. blend=all_expr='if(gte(N*SW+X,W),A,B)'
  1958. @end example
  1959. @item
  1960. Apply uncover down effect:
  1961. @example
  1962. blend=all_expr='if(gte(Y-N*SH,0),A,B)'
  1963. @end example
  1964. @item
  1965. Apply uncover up-left effect:
  1966. @example
  1967. blend=all_expr='if(gte(T*SH*40+Y,H)*gte((T*40*SW+X)*W/H,W),A,B)'
  1968. @end example
  1969. @end itemize
  1970. @section boxblur
  1971. Apply boxblur algorithm to the input video.
  1972. The filter accepts the following options:
  1973. @table @option
  1974. @item luma_radius, lr
  1975. @item luma_power, lp
  1976. @item chroma_radius, cr
  1977. @item chroma_power, cp
  1978. @item alpha_radius, ar
  1979. @item alpha_power, ap
  1980. @end table
  1981. A description of the accepted options follows.
  1982. @table @option
  1983. @item luma_radius, lr
  1984. @item chroma_radius, cr
  1985. @item alpha_radius, ar
  1986. Set an expression for the box radius in pixels used for blurring the
  1987. corresponding input plane.
  1988. The radius value must be a non-negative number, and must not be
  1989. greater than the value of the expression @code{min(w,h)/2} for the
  1990. luma and alpha planes, and of @code{min(cw,ch)/2} for the chroma
  1991. planes.
  1992. Default value for @option{luma_radius} is "2". If not specified,
  1993. @option{chroma_radius} and @option{alpha_radius} default to the
  1994. corresponding value set for @option{luma_radius}.
  1995. The expressions can contain the following constants:
  1996. @table @option
  1997. @item w
  1998. @item h
  1999. the input width and height in pixels
  2000. @item cw
  2001. @item ch
  2002. the input chroma image width and height in pixels
  2003. @item hsub
  2004. @item vsub
  2005. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2006. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2007. @end table
  2008. @item luma_power, lp
  2009. @item chroma_power, cp
  2010. @item alpha_power, ap
  2011. Specify how many times the boxblur filter is applied to the
  2012. corresponding plane.
  2013. Default value for @option{luma_power} is 2. If not specified,
  2014. @option{chroma_power} and @option{alpha_power} default to the
  2015. corresponding value set for @option{luma_power}.
  2016. A value of 0 will disable the effect.
  2017. @end table
  2018. @subsection Examples
  2019. @itemize
  2020. @item
  2021. Apply a boxblur filter with luma, chroma, and alpha radius
  2022. set to 2:
  2023. @example
  2024. boxblur=luma_radius=2:luma_power=1
  2025. boxblur=2:1
  2026. @end example
  2027. @item
  2028. Set luma radius to 2, alpha and chroma radius to 0:
  2029. @example
  2030. boxblur=2:1:cr=0:ar=0
  2031. @end example
  2032. @item
  2033. Set luma and chroma radius to a fraction of the video dimension:
  2034. @example
  2035. boxblur=luma_radius=min(h\,w)/10:luma_power=1:chroma_radius=min(cw\,ch)/10:chroma_power=1
  2036. @end example
  2037. @end itemize
  2038. @section colorbalance
  2039. Modify intensity of primary colors (red, green and blue) of input frames.
  2040. The filter allows an input frame to be adjusted in the shadows, midtones or highlights
  2041. regions for the red-cyan, green-magenta or blue-yellow balance.
  2042. A positive adjustment value shifts the balance towards the primary color, a negative
  2043. value towards the complementary color.
  2044. The filter accepts the following options:
  2045. @table @option
  2046. @item rs
  2047. @item gs
  2048. @item bs
  2049. Adjust red, green and blue shadows (darkest pixels).
  2050. @item rm
  2051. @item gm
  2052. @item bm
  2053. Adjust red, green and blue midtones (medium pixels).
  2054. @item rh
  2055. @item gh
  2056. @item bh
  2057. Adjust red, green and blue highlights (brightest pixels).
  2058. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-1.0, 1.0]}. Defaults are @code{0}.
  2059. @end table
  2060. @subsection Examples
  2061. @itemize
  2062. @item
  2063. Add red color cast to shadows:
  2064. @example
  2065. colorbalance=rs=.3
  2066. @end example
  2067. @end itemize
  2068. @section colorchannelmixer
  2069. Adjust video input frames by re-mixing color channels.
  2070. This filter modifies a color channel by adding the values associated to
  2071. the other channels of the same pixels. For example if the value to
  2072. modify is red, the output value will be:
  2073. @example
  2074. @var{red}=@var{red}*@var{rr} + @var{blue}*@var{rb} + @var{green}*@var{rg} + @var{alpha}*@var{ra}
  2075. @end example
  2076. The filter accepts the following options:
  2077. @table @option
  2078. @item rr
  2079. @item rg
  2080. @item rb
  2081. @item ra
  2082. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output red channel.
  2083. Default is @code{1} for @var{rr}, and @code{0} for @var{rg}, @var{rb} and @var{ra}.
  2084. @item gr
  2085. @item gg
  2086. @item gb
  2087. @item ga
  2088. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output green channel.
  2089. Default is @code{1} for @var{gg}, and @code{0} for @var{gr}, @var{gb} and @var{ga}.
  2090. @item br
  2091. @item bg
  2092. @item bb
  2093. @item ba
  2094. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output blue channel.
  2095. Default is @code{1} for @var{bb}, and @code{0} for @var{br}, @var{bg} and @var{ba}.
  2096. @item ar
  2097. @item ag
  2098. @item ab
  2099. @item aa
  2100. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output alpha channel.
  2101. Default is @code{1} for @var{aa}, and @code{0} for @var{ar}, @var{ag} and @var{ab}.
  2102. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-2.0, 2.0]}.
  2103. @end table
  2104. @subsection Examples
  2105. @itemize
  2106. @item
  2107. Convert source to grayscale:
  2108. @example
  2109. colorchannelmixer=.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3
  2110. @end example
  2111. @item
  2112. Simulate sepia tones:
  2113. @example
  2114. colorchannelmixer=.393:.769:.189:0:.349:.686:.168:0:.272:.534:.131
  2115. @end example
  2116. @end itemize
  2117. @section colormatrix
  2118. Convert color matrix.
  2119. The filter accepts the following options:
  2120. @table @option
  2121. @item src
  2122. @item dst
  2123. Specify the source and destination color matrix. Both values must be
  2124. specified.
  2125. The accepted values are:
  2126. @table @samp
  2127. @item bt709
  2128. BT.709
  2129. @item bt601
  2130. BT.601
  2131. @item smpte240m
  2132. SMPTE-240M
  2133. @item fcc
  2134. FCC
  2135. @end table
  2136. @end table
  2137. For example to convert from BT.601 to SMPTE-240M, use the command:
  2138. @example
  2139. colormatrix=bt601:smpte240m
  2140. @end example
  2141. @section copy
  2142. Copy the input source unchanged to the output. Mainly useful for
  2143. testing purposes.
  2144. @section crop
  2145. Crop the input video to given dimensions.
  2146. The filter accepts the following options:
  2147. @table @option
  2148. @item w, out_w
  2149. Width of the output video. It defaults to @code{iw}.
  2150. This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
  2151. configuration.
  2152. @item h, out_h
  2153. Height of the output video. It defaults to @code{ih}.
  2154. This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
  2155. configuration.
  2156. @item x
  2157. Horizontal position, in the input video, of the left edge of the output video.
  2158. It defaults to @code{(in_w-out_w)/2}.
  2159. This expression is evaluated per-frame.
  2160. @item y
  2161. Vertical position, in the input video, of the top edge of the output video.
  2162. It defaults to @code{(in_h-out_h)/2}.
  2163. This expression is evaluated per-frame.
  2164. @item keep_aspect
  2165. If set to 1 will force the output display aspect ratio
  2166. to be the same of the input, by changing the output sample aspect
  2167. ratio. It defaults to 0.
  2168. @end table
  2169. The @var{out_w}, @var{out_h}, @var{x}, @var{y} parameters are
  2170. expressions containing the following constants:
  2171. @table @option
  2172. @item x
  2173. @item y
  2174. the computed values for @var{x} and @var{y}. They are evaluated for
  2175. each new frame.
  2176. @item in_w
  2177. @item in_h
  2178. the input width and height
  2179. @item iw
  2180. @item ih
  2181. same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}
  2182. @item out_w
  2183. @item out_h
  2184. the output (cropped) width and height
  2185. @item ow
  2186. @item oh
  2187. same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}
  2188. @item a
  2189. same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  2190. @item sar
  2191. input sample aspect ratio
  2192. @item dar
  2193. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{iw} / @var{ih}) * @var{sar}
  2194. @item hsub
  2195. @item vsub
  2196. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2197. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2198. @item n
  2199. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  2200. @item pos
  2201. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  2202. @item t
  2203. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  2204. @end table
  2205. The expression for @var{out_w} may depend on the value of @var{out_h},
  2206. and the expression for @var{out_h} may depend on @var{out_w}, but they
  2207. cannot depend on @var{x} and @var{y}, as @var{x} and @var{y} are
  2208. evaluated after @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  2209. The @var{x} and @var{y} parameters specify the expressions for the
  2210. position of the top-left corner of the output (non-cropped) area. They
  2211. are evaluated for each frame. If the evaluated value is not valid, it
  2212. is approximated to the nearest valid value.
  2213. The expression for @var{x} may depend on @var{y}, and the expression
  2214. for @var{y} may depend on @var{x}.
  2215. @subsection Examples
  2216. @itemize
  2217. @item
  2218. Crop area with size 100x100 at position (12,34).
  2219. @example
  2220. crop=100:100:12:34
  2221. @end example
  2222. Using named options, the example above becomes:
  2223. @example
  2224. crop=w=100:h=100:x=12:y=34
  2225. @end example
  2226. @item
  2227. Crop the central input area with size 100x100:
  2228. @example
  2229. crop=100:100
  2230. @end example
  2231. @item
  2232. Crop the central input area with size 2/3 of the input video:
  2233. @example
  2234. crop=2/3*in_w:2/3*in_h
  2235. @end example
  2236. @item
  2237. Crop the input video central square:
  2238. @example
  2239. crop=out_w=in_h
  2240. crop=in_h
  2241. @end example
  2242. @item
  2243. Delimit the rectangle with the top-left corner placed at position
  2244. 100:100 and the right-bottom corner corresponding to the right-bottom
  2245. corner of the input image:
  2246. @example
  2247. crop=in_w-100:in_h-100:100:100
  2248. @end example
  2249. @item
  2250. Crop 10 pixels from the left and right borders, and 20 pixels from
  2251. the top and bottom borders
  2252. @example
  2253. crop=in_w-2*10:in_h-2*20
  2254. @end example
  2255. @item
  2256. Keep only the bottom right quarter of the input image:
  2257. @example
  2258. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:in_w/2:in_h/2
  2259. @end example
  2260. @item
  2261. Crop height for getting Greek harmony:
  2262. @example
  2263. crop=in_w:1/PHI*in_w
  2264. @end example
  2265. @item
  2266. Appply trembling effect:
  2267. @example
  2268. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(n/10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(n/7)
  2269. @end example
  2270. @item
  2271. Apply erratic camera effect depending on timestamp:
  2272. @example
  2273. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(t*10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(t*13)"
  2274. @end example
  2275. @item
  2276. Set x depending on the value of y:
  2277. @example
  2278. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:y:10+10*sin(n/10)
  2279. @end example
  2280. @end itemize
  2281. @section cropdetect
  2282. Auto-detect crop size.
  2283. Calculate necessary cropping parameters and prints the recommended
  2284. parameters through the logging system. The detected dimensions
  2285. correspond to the non-black area of the input video.
  2286. The filter accepts the following options:
  2287. @table @option
  2288. @item limit
  2289. Set higher black value threshold, which can be optionally specified
  2290. from nothing (0) to everything (255). An intensity value greater
  2291. to the set value is considered non-black. Default value is 24.
  2292. @item round
  2293. Set the value for which the width/height should be divisible by. The
  2294. offset is automatically adjusted to center the video. Use 2 to get
  2295. only even dimensions (needed for 4:2:2 video). 16 is best when
  2296. encoding to most video codecs. Default value is 16.
  2297. @item reset_count, reset
  2298. Set the counter that determines after how many frames cropdetect will
  2299. reset the previously detected largest video area and start over to
  2300. detect the current optimal crop area. Default value is 0.
  2301. This can be useful when channel logos distort the video area. 0
  2302. indicates never reset and return the largest area encountered during
  2303. playback.
  2304. @end table
  2305. @anchor{curves}
  2306. @section curves
  2307. Apply color adjustments using curves.
  2308. This filter is similar to the Adobe Photoshop and GIMP curves tools. Each
  2309. component (red, green and blue) has its values defined by @var{N} key points
  2310. tied from each other using a smooth curve. The x-axis represents the pixel
  2311. values from the input frame, and the y-axis the new pixel values to be set for
  2312. the output frame.
  2313. By default, a component curve is defined by the two points @var{(0;0)} and
  2314. @var{(1;1)}. This creates a straight line where each original pixel value is
  2315. "adjusted" to its own value, which means no change to the image.
  2316. The filter allows you to redefine these two points and add some more. A new
  2317. curve (using a natural cubic spline interpolation) will be define to pass
  2318. smoothly through all these new coordinates. The new defined points needs to be
  2319. strictly increasing over the x-axis, and their @var{x} and @var{y} values must
  2320. be in the @var{[0;1]} interval. If the computed curves happened to go outside
  2321. the vector spaces, the values will be clipped accordingly.
  2322. If there is no key point defined in @code{x=0}, the filter will automatically
  2323. insert a @var{(0;0)} point. In the same way, if there is no key point defined
  2324. in @code{x=1}, the filter will automatically insert a @var{(1;1)} point.
  2325. The filter accepts the following options:
  2326. @table @option
  2327. @item preset
  2328. Select one of the available color presets. This option can be used in addition
  2329. to the @option{r}, @option{g}, @option{b} parameters; in this case, the later
  2330. options takes priority on the preset values.
  2331. Available presets are:
  2332. @table @samp
  2333. @item none
  2334. @item color_negative
  2335. @item cross_process
  2336. @item darker
  2337. @item increase_contrast
  2338. @item lighter
  2339. @item linear_contrast
  2340. @item medium_contrast
  2341. @item negative
  2342. @item strong_contrast
  2343. @item vintage
  2344. @end table
  2345. Default is @code{none}.
  2346. @item master, m
  2347. Set the master key points. These points will define a second pass mapping. It
  2348. is sometimes called a "luminance" or "value" mapping. It can be used with
  2349. @option{r}, @option{g}, @option{b} or @option{all} since it acts like a
  2350. post-processing LUT.
  2351. @item red, r
  2352. Set the key points for the red component.
  2353. @item green, g
  2354. Set the key points for the green component.
  2355. @item blue, b
  2356. Set the key points for the blue component.
  2357. @item all
  2358. Set the key points for all components (not including master).
  2359. Can be used in addition to the other key points component
  2360. options. In this case, the unset component(s) will fallback on this
  2361. @option{all} setting.
  2362. @item psfile
  2363. Specify a Photoshop curves file (@code{.asv}) to import the settings from.
  2364. @end table
  2365. To avoid some filtergraph syntax conflicts, each key points list need to be
  2366. defined using the following syntax: @code{x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ...}.
  2367. @subsection Examples
  2368. @itemize
  2369. @item
  2370. Increase slightly the middle level of blue:
  2371. @example
  2372. curves=blue='0.5/0.58'
  2373. @end example
  2374. @item
  2375. Vintage effect:
  2376. @example
  2377. curves=r='0/0.11 .42/.51 1/0.95':g='0.50/0.48':b='0/0.22 .49/.44 1/0.8'
  2378. @end example
  2379. Here we obtain the following coordinates for each components:
  2380. @table @var
  2381. @item red
  2382. @code{(0;0.11) (0.42;0.51) (1;0.95)}
  2383. @item green
  2384. @code{(0;0) (0.50;0.48) (1;1)}
  2385. @item blue
  2386. @code{(0;0.22) (0.49;0.44) (1;0.80)}
  2387. @end table
  2388. @item
  2389. The previous example can also be achieved with the associated built-in preset:
  2390. @example
  2391. curves=preset=vintage
  2392. @end example
  2393. @item
  2394. Or simply:
  2395. @example
  2396. curves=vintage
  2397. @end example
  2398. @item
  2399. Use a Photoshop preset and redefine the points of the green component:
  2400. @example
  2401. curves=psfile='MyCurvesPresets/purple.asv':green='0.45/0.53'
  2402. @end example
  2403. @end itemize
  2404. @section dctdnoiz
  2405. Denoise frames using 2D DCT (frequency domain filtering).
  2406. This filter is not designed for real time and can be extremely slow.
  2407. The filter accepts the following options:
  2408. @table @option
  2409. @item sigma, s
  2410. Set the noise sigma constant.
  2411. This @var{sigma} defines a hard threshold of @code{3 * sigma}; every DCT
  2412. coefficient (absolute value) below this threshold with be dropped.
  2413. If you need a more advanced filtering, see @option{expr}.
  2414. Default is @code{0}.
  2415. @item overlap
  2416. Set number overlapping pixels for each block. Each block is of size
  2417. @code{16x16}. Since the filter can be slow, you may want to reduce this value,
  2418. at the cost of a less effective filter and the risk of various artefacts.
  2419. If the overlapping value doesn't allow to process the whole input width or
  2420. height, a warning will be displayed and according borders won't be denoised.
  2421. Default value is @code{15}.
  2422. @item expr, e
  2423. Set the coefficient factor expression.
  2424. For each coefficient of a DCT block, this expression will be evaluated as a
  2425. multiplier value for the coefficient.
  2426. If this is option is set, the @option{sigma} option will be ignored.
  2427. The absolute value of the coefficient can be accessed through the @var{c}
  2428. variable.
  2429. @end table
  2430. @subsection Examples
  2431. Apply a denoise with a @option{sigma} of @code{4.5}:
  2432. @example
  2433. dctdnoiz=4.5
  2434. @end example
  2435. The same operation can be achieved using the expression system:
  2436. @example
  2437. dctdnoiz=e='gte(c, 4.5*3)'
  2438. @end example
  2439. @anchor{decimate}
  2440. @section decimate
  2441. Drop duplicated frames at regular intervals.
  2442. The filter accepts the following options:
  2443. @table @option
  2444. @item cycle
  2445. Set the number of frames from which one will be dropped. Setting this to
  2446. @var{N} means one frame in every batch of @var{N} frames will be dropped.
  2447. Default is @code{5}.
  2448. @item dupthresh
  2449. Set the threshold for duplicate detection. If the difference metric for a frame
  2450. is less than or equal to this value, then it is declared as duplicate. Default
  2451. is @code{1.1}
  2452. @item scthresh
  2453. Set scene change threshold. Default is @code{15}.
  2454. @item blockx
  2455. @item blocky
  2456. Set the size of the x and y-axis blocks used during metric calculations.
  2457. Larger blocks give better noise suppression, but also give worse detection of
  2458. small movements. Must be a power of two. Default is @code{32}.
  2459. @item ppsrc
  2460. Mark main input as a pre-processed input and activate clean source input
  2461. stream. This allows the input to be pre-processed with various filters to help
  2462. the metrics calculation while keeping the frame selection lossless. When set to
  2463. @code{1}, the first stream is for the pre-processed input, and the second
  2464. stream is the clean source from where the kept frames are chosen. Default is
  2465. @code{0}.
  2466. @item chroma
  2467. Set whether or not chroma is considered in the metric calculations. Default is
  2468. @code{1}.
  2469. @end table
  2470. @section dejudder
  2471. Remove judder produced by partially interlaced telecined content.
  2472. Judder can be introduced, for instance, by @ref{pullup} filter. If the original
  2473. source was partially telecined content then the output of @code{pullup,dejudder}
  2474. will have a variable frame rate. May change the recorded frame rate of the
  2475. container. Aside from that change, this filter will not affect constant frame
  2476. rate video.
  2477. The option available in this filter is:
  2478. @table @option
  2479. @item cycle
  2480. Specify the length of the window over which the judder repeats.
  2481. Accepts any interger greater than 1. Useful values are:
  2482. @table @samp
  2483. @item 4
  2484. If the original was telecined from 24 to 30 fps (Film to NTSC).
  2485. @item 5
  2486. If the original was telecined from 25 to 30 fps (PAL to NTSC).
  2487. @item 20
  2488. If a mixture of the two.
  2489. @end table
  2490. The default is @samp{4}.
  2491. @end table
  2492. @section delogo
  2493. Suppress a TV station logo by a simple interpolation of the surrounding
  2494. pixels. Just set a rectangle covering the logo and watch it disappear
  2495. (and sometimes something even uglier appear - your mileage may vary).
  2496. This filter accepts the following options:
  2497. @table @option
  2498. @item x
  2499. @item y
  2500. Specify the top left corner coordinates of the logo. They must be
  2501. specified.
  2502. @item w
  2503. @item h
  2504. Specify the width and height of the logo to clear. They must be
  2505. specified.
  2506. @item band, t
  2507. Specify the thickness of the fuzzy edge of the rectangle (added to
  2508. @var{w} and @var{h}). The default value is 4.
  2509. @item show
  2510. When set to 1, a green rectangle is drawn on the screen to simplify
  2511. finding the right @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, and @var{h} parameters.
  2512. The default value is 0.
  2513. The rectangle is drawn on the outermost pixels which will be (partly)
  2514. replaced with interpolated values. The values of the next pixels
  2515. immediately outside this rectangle in each direction will be used to
  2516. compute the interpolated pixel values inside the rectangle.
  2517. @end table
  2518. @subsection Examples
  2519. @itemize
  2520. @item
  2521. Set a rectangle covering the area with top left corner coordinates 0,0
  2522. and size 100x77, setting a band of size 10:
  2523. @example
  2524. delogo=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=77:band=10
  2525. @end example
  2526. @end itemize
  2527. @section deshake
  2528. Attempt to fix small changes in horizontal and/or vertical shift. This
  2529. filter helps remove camera shake from hand-holding a camera, bumping a
  2530. tripod, moving on a vehicle, etc.
  2531. The filter accepts the following options:
  2532. @table @option
  2533. @item x
  2534. @item y
  2535. @item w
  2536. @item h
  2537. Specify a rectangular area where to limit the search for motion
  2538. vectors.
  2539. If desired the search for motion vectors can be limited to a
  2540. rectangular area of the frame defined by its top left corner, width
  2541. and height. These parameters have the same meaning as the drawbox
  2542. filter which can be used to visualise the position of the bounding
  2543. box.
  2544. This is useful when simultaneous movement of subjects within the frame
  2545. might be confused for camera motion by the motion vector search.
  2546. If any or all of @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} are set to -1
  2547. then the full frame is used. This allows later options to be set
  2548. without specifying the bounding box for the motion vector search.
  2549. Default - search the whole frame.
  2550. @item rx
  2551. @item ry
  2552. Specify the maximum extent of movement in x and y directions in the
  2553. range 0-64 pixels. Default 16.
  2554. @item edge
  2555. Specify how to generate pixels to fill blanks at the edge of the
  2556. frame. Available values are:
  2557. @table @samp
  2558. @item blank, 0
  2559. Fill zeroes at blank locations
  2560. @item original, 1
  2561. Original image at blank locations
  2562. @item clamp, 2
  2563. Extruded edge value at blank locations
  2564. @item mirror, 3
  2565. Mirrored edge at blank locations
  2566. @end table
  2567. Default value is @samp{mirror}.
  2568. @item blocksize
  2569. Specify the blocksize to use for motion search. Range 4-128 pixels,
  2570. default 8.
  2571. @item contrast
  2572. Specify the contrast threshold for blocks. Only blocks with more than
  2573. the specified contrast (difference between darkest and lightest
  2574. pixels) will be considered. Range 1-255, default 125.
  2575. @item search
  2576. Specify the search strategy. Available values are:
  2577. @table @samp
  2578. @item exhaustive, 0
  2579. Set exhaustive search
  2580. @item less, 1
  2581. Set less exhaustive search.
  2582. @end table
  2583. Default value is @samp{exhaustive}.
  2584. @item filename
  2585. If set then a detailed log of the motion search is written to the
  2586. specified file.
  2587. @item opencl
  2588. If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
  2589. FFmpeg was configured with @code{--enable-opencl}. Default value is 0.
  2590. @end table
  2591. @section drawbox
  2592. Draw a colored box on the input image.
  2593. This filter accepts the following options:
  2594. @table @option
  2595. @item x
  2596. @item y
  2597. The expressions which specify the top left corner coordinates of the box. Default to 0.
  2598. @item width, w
  2599. @item height, h
  2600. The expressions which specify the width and height of the box, if 0 they are interpreted as
  2601. the input width and height. Default to 0.
  2602. @item color, c
  2603. Specify the color of the box to write. For the general syntax of this option,
  2604. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
  2605. value @code{invert} is used, the box edge color is the same as the
  2606. video with inverted luma.
  2607. @item thickness, t
  2608. The expression which sets the thickness of the box edge. Default value is @code{3}.
  2609. See below for the list of accepted constants.
  2610. @end table
  2611. The parameters for @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} and @var{t} are expressions containing the
  2612. following constants:
  2613. @table @option
  2614. @item dar
  2615. The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  2616. @item hsub
  2617. @item vsub
  2618. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2619. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2620. @item in_h, ih
  2621. @item in_w, iw
  2622. The input width and height.
  2623. @item sar
  2624. The input sample aspect ratio.
  2625. @item x
  2626. @item y
  2627. The x and y offset coordinates where the box is drawn.
  2628. @item w
  2629. @item h
  2630. The width and height of the drawn box.
  2631. @item t
  2632. The thickness of the drawn box.
  2633. These constants allow the @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, @var{h} and @var{t} expressions to refer to
  2634. each other, so you may for example specify @code{y=x/dar} or @code{h=w/dar}.
  2635. @end table
  2636. @subsection Examples
  2637. @itemize
  2638. @item
  2639. Draw a black box around the edge of the input image:
  2640. @example
  2641. drawbox
  2642. @end example
  2643. @item
  2644. Draw a box with color red and an opacity of 50%:
  2645. @example
  2646. drawbox=10:20:200:60:red@@0.5
  2647. @end example
  2648. The previous example can be specified as:
  2649. @example
  2650. drawbox=x=10:y=20:w=200:h=60:color=red@@0.5
  2651. @end example
  2652. @item
  2653. Fill the box with pink color:
  2654. @example
  2655. drawbox=x=10:y=10:w=100:h=100:color=pink@@0.5:t=max
  2656. @end example
  2657. @item
  2658. Draw a 2-pixel red 2.40:1 mask:
  2659. @example
  2660. drawbox=x=-t:y=0.5*(ih-iw/2.4)-t:w=iw+t*2:h=iw/2.4+t*2:t=2:c=red
  2661. @end example
  2662. @end itemize
  2663. @section drawgrid
  2664. Draw a grid on the input image.
  2665. This filter accepts the following options:
  2666. @table @option
  2667. @item x
  2668. @item y
  2669. The expressions which specify the coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset). Both default to 0.
  2670. @item width, w
  2671. @item height, h
  2672. The expressions which specify the width and height of the grid cell, if 0 they are interpreted as the
  2673. input width and height, respectively, minus @code{thickness}, so image gets
  2674. framed. Default to 0.
  2675. @item color, c
  2676. Specify the color of the grid. For the general syntax of this option,
  2677. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
  2678. value @code{invert} is used, the grid color is the same as the
  2679. video with inverted luma.
  2680. @item thickness, t
  2681. The expression which sets the thickness of the grid line. Default value is @code{1}.
  2682. See below for the list of accepted constants.
  2683. @end table
  2684. The parameters for @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} and @var{t} are expressions containing the
  2685. following constants:
  2686. @table @option
  2687. @item dar
  2688. The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  2689. @item hsub
  2690. @item vsub
  2691. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2692. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2693. @item in_h, ih
  2694. @item in_w, iw
  2695. The input grid cell width and height.
  2696. @item sar
  2697. The input sample aspect ratio.
  2698. @item x
  2699. @item y
  2700. The x and y coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset).
  2701. @item w
  2702. @item h
  2703. The width and height of the drawn cell.
  2704. @item t
  2705. The thickness of the drawn cell.
  2706. These constants allow the @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, @var{h} and @var{t} expressions to refer to
  2707. each other, so you may for example specify @code{y=x/dar} or @code{h=w/dar}.
  2708. @end table
  2709. @subsection Examples
  2710. @itemize
  2711. @item
  2712. Draw a grid with cell 100x100 pixels, thickness 2 pixels, with color red and an opacity of 50%:
  2713. @example
  2714. drawgrid=width=100:height=100:thickness=2:color=red@@0.5
  2715. @end example
  2716. @item
  2717. Draw a white 3x3 grid with an opacity of 50%:
  2718. @example
  2719. drawgrid=w=iw/3:h=ih/3:t=2:c=white@@0.5
  2720. @end example
  2721. @end itemize
  2722. @anchor{drawtext}
  2723. @section drawtext
  2724. Draw text string or text from specified file on top of video using the
  2725. libfreetype library.
  2726. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  2727. @code{--enable-libfreetype}.
  2728. @subsection Syntax
  2729. The description of the accepted parameters follows.
  2730. @table @option
  2731. @item box
  2732. Used to draw a box around text using background color.
  2733. Value should be either 1 (enable) or 0 (disable).
  2734. The default value of @var{box} is 0.
  2735. @item boxcolor
  2736. The color to be used for drawing box around text. For the syntax of this
  2737. option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2738. The default value of @var{boxcolor} is "white".
  2739. @item borderw
  2740. Set the width of the border to be drawn around the text using @var{bordercolor}.
  2741. The default value of @var{borderw} is 0.
  2742. @item bordercolor
  2743. Set the color to be used for drawing border around text. For the syntax of this
  2744. option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2745. The default value of @var{bordercolor} is "black".
  2746. @item expansion
  2747. Select how the @var{text} is expanded. Can be either @code{none},
  2748. @code{strftime} (deprecated) or
  2749. @code{normal} (default). See the @ref{drawtext_expansion, Text expansion} section
  2750. below for details.
  2751. @item fix_bounds
  2752. If true, check and fix text coords to avoid clipping.
  2753. @item fontcolor
  2754. The color to be used for drawing fonts. For the syntax of this option, check
  2755. the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2756. The default value of @var{fontcolor} is "black".
  2757. @item fontfile
  2758. The font file to be used for drawing text. Path must be included.
  2759. This parameter is mandatory.
  2760. @item fontsize
  2761. The font size to be used for drawing text.
  2762. The default value of @var{fontsize} is 16.
  2763. @item ft_load_flags
  2764. Flags to be used for loading the fonts.
  2765. The flags map the corresponding flags supported by libfreetype, and are
  2766. a combination of the following values:
  2767. @table @var
  2768. @item default
  2769. @item no_scale
  2770. @item no_hinting
  2771. @item render
  2772. @item no_bitmap
  2773. @item vertical_layout
  2774. @item force_autohint
  2775. @item crop_bitmap
  2776. @item pedantic
  2777. @item ignore_global_advance_width
  2778. @item no_recurse
  2779. @item ignore_transform
  2780. @item monochrome
  2781. @item linear_design
  2782. @item no_autohint
  2783. @end table
  2784. Default value is "default".
  2785. For more information consult the documentation for the FT_LOAD_*
  2786. libfreetype flags.
  2787. @item shadowcolor
  2788. The color to be used for drawing a shadow behind the drawn text. For the
  2789. syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2790. The default value of @var{shadowcolor} is "black".
  2791. @item shadowx
  2792. @item shadowy
  2793. The x and y offsets for the text shadow position with respect to the
  2794. position of the text. They can be either positive or negative
  2795. values. Default value for both is "0".
  2796. @item start_number
  2797. The starting frame number for the n/frame_num variable. The default value
  2798. is "0".
  2799. @item tabsize
  2800. The size in number of spaces to use for rendering the tab.
  2801. Default value is 4.
  2802. @item timecode
  2803. Set the initial timecode representation in "hh:mm:ss[:;.]ff"
  2804. format. It can be used with or without text parameter. @var{timecode_rate}
  2805. option must be specified.
  2806. @item timecode_rate, rate, r
  2807. Set the timecode frame rate (timecode only).
  2808. @item text
  2809. The text string to be drawn. The text must be a sequence of UTF-8
  2810. encoded characters.
  2811. This parameter is mandatory if no file is specified with the parameter
  2812. @var{textfile}.
  2813. @item textfile
  2814. A text file containing text to be drawn. The text must be a sequence
  2815. of UTF-8 encoded characters.
  2816. This parameter is mandatory if no text string is specified with the
  2817. parameter @var{text}.
  2818. If both @var{text} and @var{textfile} are specified, an error is thrown.
  2819. @item reload
  2820. If set to 1, the @var{textfile} will be reloaded before each frame.
  2821. Be sure to update it atomically, or it may be read partially, or even fail.
  2822. @item x
  2823. @item y
  2824. The expressions which specify the offsets where text will be drawn
  2825. within the video frame. They are relative to the top/left border of the
  2826. output image.
  2827. The default value of @var{x} and @var{y} is "0".
  2828. See below for the list of accepted constants and functions.
  2829. @end table
  2830. The parameters for @var{x} and @var{y} are expressions containing the
  2831. following constants and functions:
  2832. @table @option
  2833. @item dar
  2834. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}
  2835. @item hsub
  2836. @item vsub
  2837. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2838. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2839. @item line_h, lh
  2840. the height of each text line
  2841. @item main_h, h, H
  2842. the input height
  2843. @item main_w, w, W
  2844. the input width
  2845. @item max_glyph_a, ascent
  2846. the maximum distance from the baseline to the highest/upper grid
  2847. coordinate used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered
  2848. glyphs.
  2849. It is a positive value, due to the grid's orientation with the Y axis
  2850. upwards.
  2851. @item max_glyph_d, descent
  2852. the maximum distance from the baseline to the lowest grid coordinate
  2853. used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered glyphs.
  2854. This is a negative value, due to the grid's orientation, with the Y axis
  2855. upwards.
  2856. @item max_glyph_h
  2857. maximum glyph height, that is the maximum height for all the glyphs
  2858. contained in the rendered text, it is equivalent to @var{ascent} -
  2859. @var{descent}.
  2860. @item max_glyph_w
  2861. maximum glyph width, that is the maximum width for all the glyphs
  2862. contained in the rendered text
  2863. @item n
  2864. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  2865. @item rand(min, max)
  2866. return a random number included between @var{min} and @var{max}
  2867. @item sar
  2868. input sample aspect ratio
  2869. @item t
  2870. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  2871. @item text_h, th
  2872. the height of the rendered text
  2873. @item text_w, tw
  2874. the width of the rendered text
  2875. @item x
  2876. @item y
  2877. the x and y offset coordinates where the text is drawn.
  2878. These parameters allow the @var{x} and @var{y} expressions to refer
  2879. each other, so you can for example specify @code{y=x/dar}.
  2880. @end table
  2881. If libavfilter was built with @code{--enable-fontconfig}, then
  2882. @option{fontfile} can be a fontconfig pattern or omitted.
  2883. @anchor{drawtext_expansion}
  2884. @subsection Text expansion
  2885. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{strftime},
  2886. the filter recognizes strftime() sequences in the provided text and
  2887. expands them accordingly. Check the documentation of strftime(). This
  2888. feature is deprecated.
  2889. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{none}, the text is printed verbatim.
  2890. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{normal} (which is the default),
  2891. the following expansion mechanism is used.
  2892. The backslash character '\', followed by any character, always expands to
  2893. the second character.
  2894. Sequence of the form @code{%@{...@}} are expanded. The text between the
  2895. braces is a function name, possibly followed by arguments separated by ':'.
  2896. If the arguments contain special characters or delimiters (':' or '@}'),
  2897. they should be escaped.
  2898. Note that they probably must also be escaped as the value for the
  2899. @option{text} option in the filter argument string and as the filter
  2900. argument in the filtergraph description, and possibly also for the shell,
  2901. that makes up to four levels of escaping; using a text file avoids these
  2902. problems.
  2903. The following functions are available:
  2904. @table @command
  2905. @item expr, e
  2906. The expression evaluation result.
  2907. It must take one argument specifying the expression to be evaluated,
  2908. which accepts the same constants and functions as the @var{x} and
  2909. @var{y} values. Note that not all constants should be used, for
  2910. example the text size is not known when evaluating the expression, so
  2911. the constants @var{text_w} and @var{text_h} will have an undefined
  2912. value.
  2913. @item gmtime
  2914. The time at which the filter is running, expressed in UTC.
  2915. It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
  2916. @item localtime
  2917. The time at which the filter is running, expressed in the local time zone.
  2918. It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
  2919. @item metadata
  2920. Frame metadata. It must take one argument specifying metadata key.
  2921. @item n, frame_num
  2922. The frame number, starting from 0.
  2923. @item pict_type
  2924. A 1 character description of the current picture type.
  2925. @item pts
  2926. The timestamp of the current frame, in seconds, with microsecond accuracy.
  2927. @end table
  2928. @subsection Examples
  2929. @itemize
  2930. @item
  2931. Draw "Test Text" with font FreeSerif, using the default values for the
  2932. optional parameters.
  2933. @example
  2934. drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text'"
  2935. @end example
  2936. @item
  2937. Draw 'Test Text' with font FreeSerif of size 24 at position x=100
  2938. and y=50 (counting from the top-left corner of the screen), text is
  2939. yellow with a red box around it. Both the text and the box have an
  2940. opacity of 20%.
  2941. @example
  2942. drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text':\
  2943. x=100: y=50: fontsize=24: fontcolor=yellow@@0.2: box=1: boxcolor=red@@0.2"
  2944. @end example
  2945. Note that the double quotes are not necessary if spaces are not used
  2946. within the parameter list.
  2947. @item
  2948. Show the text at the center of the video frame:
  2949. @example
  2950. drawtext="fontsize=30:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='hello world':x=(w-text_w)/2:y=(h-text_h-line_h)/2"
  2951. @end example
  2952. @item
  2953. Show a text line sliding from right to left in the last row of the video
  2954. frame. The file @file{LONG_LINE} is assumed to contain a single line
  2955. with no newlines.
  2956. @example
  2957. drawtext="fontsize=15:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=LONG_LINE:y=h-line_h:x=-50*t"
  2958. @end example
  2959. @item
  2960. Show the content of file @file{CREDITS} off the bottom of the frame and scroll up.
  2961. @example
  2962. drawtext="fontsize=20:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:textfile=CREDITS:y=h-20*t"
  2963. @end example
  2964. @item
  2965. Draw a single green letter "g", at the center of the input video.
  2966. The glyph baseline is placed at half screen height.
  2967. @example
  2968. drawtext="fontsize=60:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=green:text=g:x=(w-max_glyph_w)/2:y=h/2-ascent"
  2969. @end example
  2970. @item
  2971. Show text for 1 second every 3 seconds:
  2972. @example
  2973. drawtext="fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=white:x=100:y=x/dar:enable=lt(mod(t\,3)\,1):text='blink'"
  2974. @end example
  2975. @item
  2976. Use fontconfig to set the font. Note that the colons need to be escaped.
  2977. @example
  2978. drawtext='fontfile=Linux Libertine O-40\:style=Semibold:text=FFmpeg'
  2979. @end example
  2980. @item
  2981. Print the date of a real-time encoding (see strftime(3)):
  2982. @example
  2983. drawtext='fontfile=FreeSans.ttf:text=%@{localtime:%a %b %d %Y@}'
  2984. @end example
  2985. @end itemize
  2986. For more information about libfreetype, check:
  2987. @url{http://www.freetype.org/}.
  2988. For more information about fontconfig, check:
  2989. @url{http://freedesktop.org/software/fontconfig/fontconfig-user.html}.
  2990. @section edgedetect
  2991. Detect and draw edges. The filter uses the Canny Edge Detection algorithm.
  2992. The filter accepts the following options:
  2993. @table @option
  2994. @item low
  2995. @item high
  2996. Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding
  2997. algorithm.
  2998. The high threshold selects the "strong" edge pixels, which are then
  2999. connected through 8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected
  3000. by the low threshold.
  3001. @var{low} and @var{high} threshold values must be choosen in the range
  3002. [0,1], and @var{low} should be lesser or equal to @var{high}.
  3003. Default value for @var{low} is @code{20/255}, and default value for @var{high}
  3004. is @code{50/255}.
  3005. @end table
  3006. Example:
  3007. @example
  3008. edgedetect=low=0.1:high=0.4
  3009. @end example
  3010. @section extractplanes
  3011. Extract color channel components from input video stream into
  3012. separate grayscale video streams.
  3013. The filter accepts the following option:
  3014. @table @option
  3015. @item planes
  3016. Set plane(s) to extract.
  3017. Available values for planes are:
  3018. @table @samp
  3019. @item y
  3020. @item u
  3021. @item v
  3022. @item a
  3023. @item r
  3024. @item g
  3025. @item b
  3026. @end table
  3027. Choosing planes not available in the input will result in an error.
  3028. That means you cannot select @code{r}, @code{g}, @code{b} planes
  3029. with @code{y}, @code{u}, @code{v} planes at same time.
  3030. @end table
  3031. @subsection Examples
  3032. @itemize
  3033. @item
  3034. Extract luma, u and v color channel component from input video frame
  3035. into 3 grayscale outputs:
  3036. @example
  3037. ffmpeg -i video.avi -filter_complex 'extractplanes=y+u+v[y][u][v]' -map '[y]' y.avi -map '[u]' u.avi -map '[v]' v.avi
  3038. @end example
  3039. @end itemize
  3040. @section elbg
  3041. Apply a posterize effect using the ELBG (Enhanced LBG) algorithm.
  3042. For each input image, the filter will compute the optimal mapping from
  3043. the input to the output given the codebook length, that is the number
  3044. of distinct output colors.
  3045. This filter accepts the following options.
  3046. @table @option
  3047. @item codebook_length, l
  3048. Set codebook length. The value must be a positive integer, and
  3049. represents the number of distinct output colors. Default value is 256.
  3050. @item nb_steps, n
  3051. Set the maximum number of iterations to apply for computing the optimal
  3052. mapping. The higher the value the better the result and the higher the
  3053. computation time. Default value is 1.
  3054. @item seed, s
  3055. Set a random seed, must be an integer included between 0 and
  3056. UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to -1, the filter
  3057. will try to use a good random seed on a best effort basis.
  3058. @end table
  3059. @section fade
  3060. Apply fade-in/out effect to input video.
  3061. This filter accepts the following options:
  3062. @table @option
  3063. @item type, t
  3064. The effect type -- can be either "in" for fade-in, or "out" for a fade-out
  3065. effect.
  3066. Default is @code{in}.
  3067. @item start_frame, s
  3068. Specify the number of the start frame for starting to apply the fade
  3069. effect. Default is 0.
  3070. @item nb_frames, n
  3071. The number of frames for which the fade effect has to last. At the end of the
  3072. fade-in effect the output video will have the same intensity as the input video,
  3073. at the end of the fade-out transition the output video will be filled with the
  3074. selected @option{color}.
  3075. Default is 25.
  3076. @item alpha
  3077. If set to 1, fade only alpha channel, if one exists on the input.
  3078. Default value is 0.
  3079. @item start_time, st
  3080. Specify the timestamp (in seconds) of the frame to start to apply the fade
  3081. effect. If both start_frame and start_time are specified, the fade will start at
  3082. whichever comes last. Default is 0.
  3083. @item duration, d
  3084. The number of seconds for which the fade effect has to last. At the end of the
  3085. fade-in effect the output video will have the same intensity as the input video,
  3086. at the end of the fade-out transition the output video will be filled with the
  3087. selected @option{color}.
  3088. If both duration and nb_frames are specified, duration is used. Default is 0.
  3089. @item color, c
  3090. Specify the color of the fade. Default is "black".
  3091. @end table
  3092. @subsection Examples
  3093. @itemize
  3094. @item
  3095. Fade in first 30 frames of video:
  3096. @example
  3097. fade=in:0:30
  3098. @end example
  3099. The command above is equivalent to:
  3100. @example
  3101. fade=t=in:s=0:n=30
  3102. @end example
  3103. @item
  3104. Fade out last 45 frames of a 200-frame video:
  3105. @example
  3106. fade=out:155:45
  3107. fade=type=out:start_frame=155:nb_frames=45
  3108. @end example
  3109. @item
  3110. Fade in first 25 frames and fade out last 25 frames of a 1000-frame video:
  3111. @example
  3112. fade=in:0:25, fade=out:975:25
  3113. @end example
  3114. @item
  3115. Make first 5 frames yellow, then fade in from frame 5-24:
  3116. @example
  3117. fade=in:5:20:color=yellow
  3118. @end example
  3119. @item
  3120. Fade in alpha over first 25 frames of video:
  3121. @example
  3122. fade=in:0:25:alpha=1
  3123. @end example
  3124. @item
  3125. Make first 5.5 seconds black, then fade in for 0.5 seconds:
  3126. @example
  3127. fade=t=in:st=5.5:d=0.5
  3128. @end example
  3129. @end itemize
  3130. @section field
  3131. Extract a single field from an interlaced image using stride
  3132. arithmetic to avoid wasting CPU time. The output frames are marked as
  3133. non-interlaced.
  3134. The filter accepts the following options:
  3135. @table @option
  3136. @item type
  3137. Specify whether to extract the top (if the value is @code{0} or
  3138. @code{top}) or the bottom field (if the value is @code{1} or
  3139. @code{bottom}).
  3140. @end table
  3141. @section fieldmatch
  3142. Field matching filter for inverse telecine. It is meant to reconstruct the
  3143. progressive frames from a telecined stream. The filter does not drop duplicated
  3144. frames, so to achieve a complete inverse telecine @code{fieldmatch} needs to be
  3145. followed by a decimation filter such as @ref{decimate} in the filtergraph.
  3146. The separation of the field matching and the decimation is notably motivated by
  3147. the possibility of inserting a de-interlacing filter fallback between the two.
  3148. If the source has mixed telecined and real interlaced content,
  3149. @code{fieldmatch} will not be able to match fields for the interlaced parts.
  3150. But these remaining combed frames will be marked as interlaced, and thus can be
  3151. de-interlaced by a later filter such as @ref{yadif} before decimation.
  3152. In addition to the various configuration options, @code{fieldmatch} can take an
  3153. optional second stream, activated through the @option{ppsrc} option. If
  3154. enabled, the frames reconstruction will be based on the fields and frames from
  3155. this second stream. This allows the first input to be pre-processed in order to
  3156. help the various algorithms of the filter, while keeping the output lossless
  3157. (assuming the fields are matched properly). Typically, a field-aware denoiser,
  3158. or brightness/contrast adjustments can help.
  3159. Note that this filter uses the same algorithms as TIVTC/TFM (AviSynth project)
  3160. and VIVTC/VFM (VapourSynth project). The later is a light clone of TFM from
  3161. which @code{fieldmatch} is based on. While the semantic and usage are very
  3162. close, some behaviour and options names can differ.
  3163. The filter accepts the following options:
  3164. @table @option
  3165. @item order
  3166. Specify the assumed field order of the input stream. Available values are:
  3167. @table @samp
  3168. @item auto
  3169. Auto detect parity (use FFmpeg's internal parity value).
  3170. @item bff
  3171. Assume bottom field first.
  3172. @item tff
  3173. Assume top field first.
  3174. @end table
  3175. Note that it is sometimes recommended not to trust the parity announced by the
  3176. stream.
  3177. Default value is @var{auto}.
  3178. @item mode
  3179. Set the matching mode or strategy to use. @option{pc} mode is the safest in the
  3180. sense that it won't risk creating jerkiness due to duplicate frames when
  3181. possible, but if there are bad edits or blended fields it will end up
  3182. outputting combed frames when a good match might actually exist. On the other
  3183. hand, @option{pcn_ub} mode is the most risky in terms of creating jerkiness,
  3184. but will almost always find a good frame if there is one. The other values are
  3185. all somewhere in between @option{pc} and @option{pcn_ub} in terms of risking
  3186. jerkiness and creating duplicate frames versus finding good matches in sections
  3187. with bad edits, orphaned fields, blended fields, etc.
  3188. More details about p/c/n/u/b are available in @ref{p/c/n/u/b meaning} section.
  3189. Available values are:
  3190. @table @samp
  3191. @item pc
  3192. 2-way matching (p/c)
  3193. @item pc_n
  3194. 2-way matching, and trying 3rd match if still combed (p/c + n)
  3195. @item pc_u
  3196. 2-way matching, and trying 3rd match (same order) if still combed (p/c + u)
  3197. @item pc_n_ub
  3198. 2-way matching, trying 3rd match if still combed, and trying 4th/5th matches if
  3199. still combed (p/c + n + u/b)
  3200. @item pcn
  3201. 3-way matching (p/c/n)
  3202. @item pcn_ub
  3203. 3-way matching, and trying 4th/5th matches if all 3 of the original matches are
  3204. detected as combed (p/c/n + u/b)
  3205. @end table
  3206. The parenthesis at the end indicate the matches that would be used for that
  3207. mode assuming @option{order}=@var{tff} (and @option{field} on @var{auto} or
  3208. @var{top}).
  3209. In terms of speed @option{pc} mode is by far the fastest and @option{pcn_ub} is
  3210. the slowest.
  3211. Default value is @var{pc_n}.
  3212. @item ppsrc
  3213. Mark the main input stream as a pre-processed input, and enable the secondary
  3214. input stream as the clean source to pick the fields from. See the filter
  3215. introduction for more details. It is similar to the @option{clip2} feature from
  3216. VFM/TFM.
  3217. Default value is @code{0} (disabled).
  3218. @item field
  3219. Set the field to match from. It is recommended to set this to the same value as
  3220. @option{order} unless you experience matching failures with that setting. In
  3221. certain circumstances changing the field that is used to match from can have a
  3222. large impact on matching performance. Available values are:
  3223. @table @samp
  3224. @item auto
  3225. Automatic (same value as @option{order}).
  3226. @item bottom
  3227. Match from the bottom field.
  3228. @item top
  3229. Match from the top field.
  3230. @end table
  3231. Default value is @var{auto}.
  3232. @item mchroma
  3233. Set whether or not chroma is included during the match comparisons. In most
  3234. cases it is recommended to leave this enabled. You should set this to @code{0}
  3235. only if your clip has bad chroma problems such as heavy rainbowing or other
  3236. artifacts. Setting this to @code{0} could also be used to speed things up at
  3237. the cost of some accuracy.
  3238. Default value is @code{1}.
  3239. @item y0
  3240. @item y1
  3241. These define an exclusion band which excludes the lines between @option{y0} and
  3242. @option{y1} from being included in the field matching decision. An exclusion
  3243. band can be used to ignore subtitles, a logo, or other things that may
  3244. interfere with the matching. @option{y0} sets the starting scan line and
  3245. @option{y1} sets the ending line; all lines in between @option{y0} and
  3246. @option{y1} (including @option{y0} and @option{y1}) will be ignored. Setting
  3247. @option{y0} and @option{y1} to the same value will disable the feature.
  3248. @option{y0} and @option{y1} defaults to @code{0}.
  3249. @item scthresh
  3250. Set the scene change detection threshold as a percentage of maximum change on
  3251. the luma plane. Good values are in the @code{[8.0, 14.0]} range. Scene change
  3252. detection is only relevant in case @option{combmatch}=@var{sc}. The range for
  3253. @option{scthresh} is @code{[0.0, 100.0]}.
  3254. Default value is @code{12.0}.
  3255. @item combmatch
  3256. When @option{combatch} is not @var{none}, @code{fieldmatch} will take into
  3257. account the combed scores of matches when deciding what match to use as the
  3258. final match. Available values are:
  3259. @table @samp
  3260. @item none
  3261. No final matching based on combed scores.
  3262. @item sc
  3263. Combed scores are only used when a scene change is detected.
  3264. @item full
  3265. Use combed scores all the time.
  3266. @end table
  3267. Default is @var{sc}.
  3268. @item combdbg
  3269. Force @code{fieldmatch} to calculate the combed metrics for certain matches and
  3270. print them. This setting is known as @option{micout} in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
  3271. Available values are:
  3272. @table @samp
  3273. @item none
  3274. No forced calculation.
  3275. @item pcn
  3276. Force p/c/n calculations.
  3277. @item pcnub
  3278. Force p/c/n/u/b calculations.
  3279. @end table
  3280. Default value is @var{none}.
  3281. @item cthresh
  3282. This is the area combing threshold used for combed frame detection. This
  3283. essentially controls how "strong" or "visible" combing must be to be detected.
  3284. Larger values mean combing must be more visible and smaller values mean combing
  3285. can be less visible or strong and still be detected. Valid settings are from
  3286. @code{-1} (every pixel will be detected as combed) to @code{255} (no pixel will
  3287. be detected as combed). This is basically a pixel difference value. A good
  3288. range is @code{[8, 12]}.
  3289. Default value is @code{9}.
  3290. @item chroma
  3291. Sets whether or not chroma is considered in the combed frame decision. Only
  3292. disable this if your source has chroma problems (rainbowing, etc.) that are
  3293. causing problems for the combed frame detection with chroma enabled. Actually,
  3294. using @option{chroma}=@var{0} is usually more reliable, except for the case
  3295. where there is chroma only combing in the source.
  3296. Default value is @code{0}.
  3297. @item blockx
  3298. @item blocky
  3299. Respectively set the x-axis and y-axis size of the window used during combed
  3300. frame detection. This has to do with the size of the area in which
  3301. @option{combpel} pixels are required to be detected as combed for a frame to be
  3302. declared combed. See the @option{combpel} parameter description for more info.
  3303. Possible values are any number that is a power of 2 starting at 4 and going up
  3304. to 512.
  3305. Default value is @code{16}.
  3306. @item combpel
  3307. The number of combed pixels inside any of the @option{blocky} by
  3308. @option{blockx} size blocks on the frame for the frame to be detected as
  3309. combed. While @option{cthresh} controls how "visible" the combing must be, this
  3310. setting controls "how much" combing there must be in any localized area (a
  3311. window defined by the @option{blockx} and @option{blocky} settings) on the
  3312. frame. Minimum value is @code{0} and maximum is @code{blocky x blockx} (at
  3313. which point no frames will ever be detected as combed). This setting is known
  3314. as @option{MI} in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
  3315. Default value is @code{80}.
  3316. @end table
  3317. @anchor{p/c/n/u/b meaning}
  3318. @subsection p/c/n/u/b meaning
  3319. @subsubsection p/c/n
  3320. We assume the following telecined stream:
  3321. @example
  3322. Top fields: 1 2 2 3 4
  3323. Bottom fields: 1 2 3 4 4
  3324. @end example
  3325. The numbers correspond to the progressive frame the fields relate to. Here, the
  3326. first two frames are progressive, the 3rd and 4th are combed, and so on.
  3327. When @code{fieldmatch} is configured to run a matching from bottom
  3328. (@option{field}=@var{bottom}) this is how this input stream get transformed:
  3329. @example
  3330. Input stream:
  3331. T 1 2 2 3 4
  3332. B 1 2 3 4 4 <-- matching reference
  3333. Matches: c c n n c
  3334. Output stream:
  3335. T 1 2 3 4 4
  3336. B 1 2 3 4 4
  3337. @end example
  3338. As a result of the field matching, we can see that some frames get duplicated.
  3339. To perform a complete inverse telecine, you need to rely on a decimation filter
  3340. after this operation. See for instance the @ref{decimate} filter.
  3341. The same operation now matching from top fields (@option{field}=@var{top})
  3342. looks like this:
  3343. @example
  3344. Input stream:
  3345. T 1 2 2 3 4 <-- matching reference
  3346. B 1 2 3 4 4
  3347. Matches: c c p p c
  3348. Output stream:
  3349. T 1 2 2 3 4
  3350. B 1 2 2 3 4
  3351. @end example
  3352. In these examples, we can see what @var{p}, @var{c} and @var{n} mean;
  3353. basically, they refer to the frame and field of the opposite parity:
  3354. @itemize
  3355. @item @var{p} matches the field of the opposite parity in the previous frame
  3356. @item @var{c} matches the field of the opposite parity in the current frame
  3357. @item @var{n} matches the field of the opposite parity in the next frame
  3358. @end itemize
  3359. @subsubsection u/b
  3360. The @var{u} and @var{b} matching are a bit special in the sense that they match
  3361. from the opposite parity flag. In the following examples, we assume that we are
  3362. currently matching the 2nd frame (Top:2, bottom:2). According to the match, a
  3363. 'x' is placed above and below each matched fields.
  3364. With bottom matching (@option{field}=@var{bottom}):
  3365. @example
  3366. Match: c p n b u
  3367. x x x x x
  3368. Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
  3369. Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
  3370. x x x x x
  3371. Output frames:
  3372. 2 1 2 2 2
  3373. 2 2 2 1 3
  3374. @end example
  3375. With top matching (@option{field}=@var{top}):
  3376. @example
  3377. Match: c p n b u
  3378. x x x x x
  3379. Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
  3380. Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
  3381. x x x x x
  3382. Output frames:
  3383. 2 2 2 1 2
  3384. 2 1 3 2 2
  3385. @end example
  3386. @subsection Examples
  3387. Simple IVTC of a top field first telecined stream:
  3388. @example
  3389. fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=none, decimate
  3390. @end example
  3391. Advanced IVTC, with fallback on @ref{yadif} for still combed frames:
  3392. @example
  3393. fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=full, yadif=deint=interlaced, decimate
  3394. @end example
  3395. @section fieldorder
  3396. Transform the field order of the input video.
  3397. This filter accepts the following options:
  3398. @table @option
  3399. @item order
  3400. Output field order. Valid values are @var{tff} for top field first or @var{bff}
  3401. for bottom field first.
  3402. @end table
  3403. Default value is @samp{tff}.
  3404. Transformation is achieved by shifting the picture content up or down
  3405. by one line, and filling the remaining line with appropriate picture content.
  3406. This method is consistent with most broadcast field order converters.
  3407. If the input video is not flagged as being interlaced, or it is already
  3408. flagged as being of the required output field order then this filter does
  3409. not alter the incoming video.
  3410. This filter is very useful when converting to or from PAL DV material,
  3411. which is bottom field first.
  3412. For example:
  3413. @example
  3414. ffmpeg -i in.vob -vf "fieldorder=bff" out.dv
  3415. @end example
  3416. @section fifo
  3417. Buffer input images and send them when they are requested.
  3418. This filter is mainly useful when auto-inserted by the libavfilter
  3419. framework.
  3420. The filter does not take parameters.
  3421. @anchor{format}
  3422. @section format
  3423. Convert the input video to one of the specified pixel formats.
  3424. Libavfilter will try to pick one that is supported for the input to
  3425. the next filter.
  3426. This filter accepts the following parameters:
  3427. @table @option
  3428. @item pix_fmts
  3429. A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, for example
  3430. "pix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
  3431. @end table
  3432. @subsection Examples
  3433. @itemize
  3434. @item
  3435. Convert the input video to the format @var{yuv420p}
  3436. @example
  3437. format=pix_fmts=yuv420p
  3438. @end example
  3439. Convert the input video to any of the formats in the list
  3440. @example
  3441. format=pix_fmts=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
  3442. @end example
  3443. @end itemize
  3444. @anchor{fps}
  3445. @section fps
  3446. Convert the video to specified constant frame rate by duplicating or dropping
  3447. frames as necessary.
  3448. This filter accepts the following named parameters:
  3449. @table @option
  3450. @item fps
  3451. Desired output frame rate. The default is @code{25}.
  3452. @item round
  3453. Rounding method.
  3454. Possible values are:
  3455. @table @option
  3456. @item zero
  3457. zero round towards 0
  3458. @item inf
  3459. round away from 0
  3460. @item down
  3461. round towards -infinity
  3462. @item up
  3463. round towards +infinity
  3464. @item near
  3465. round to nearest
  3466. @end table
  3467. The default is @code{near}.
  3468. @item start_time
  3469. Assume the first PTS should be the given value, in seconds. This allows for
  3470. padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no assumption is made
  3471. about the first frame's expected PTS, so no padding or trimming is done.
  3472. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with duplicates of
  3473. the first frame if a video stream starts after the audio stream or to trim any
  3474. frames with a negative PTS.
  3475. @end table
  3476. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
  3477. @var{fps}[:@var{round}].
  3478. See also the @ref{setpts} filter.
  3479. @subsection Examples
  3480. @itemize
  3481. @item
  3482. A typical usage in order to set the fps to 25:
  3483. @example
  3484. fps=fps=25
  3485. @end example
  3486. @item
  3487. Sets the fps to 24, using abbreviation and rounding method to round to nearest:
  3488. @example
  3489. fps=fps=film:round=near
  3490. @end example
  3491. @end itemize
  3492. @section framepack
  3493. Pack two different video streams into a stereoscopic video, setting proper
  3494. metadata on supported codecs. The two views should have the same size and
  3495. framerate and processing will stop when the shorter video ends. Please note
  3496. that you may conveniently adjust view properties with the @ref{scale} and
  3497. @ref{fps} filters.
  3498. This filter accepts the following named parameters:
  3499. @table @option
  3500. @item format
  3501. Desired packing format. Supported values are:
  3502. @table @option
  3503. @item sbs
  3504. Views are next to each other (default).
  3505. @item tab
  3506. Views are on top of each other.
  3507. @item lines
  3508. Views are packed by line.
  3509. @item columns
  3510. Views are eacked by column.
  3511. @item frameseq
  3512. Views are temporally interleaved.
  3513. @end table
  3514. @end table
  3515. Some examples follow:
  3516. @example
  3517. # Convert left and right views into a frame sequential video.
  3518. ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex framepack=frameseq OUTPUT
  3519. # Convert views into a side-by-side video with the same output resolution as the input.
  3520. ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex [0:v]scale=w=iw/2[left],[1:v]scale=w=iw/2[right],[left][right]framepack=sbs OUTPUT
  3521. @end example
  3522. @section framestep
  3523. Select one frame every N-th frame.
  3524. This filter accepts the following option:
  3525. @table @option
  3526. @item step
  3527. Select frame after every @code{step} frames.
  3528. Allowed values are positive integers higher than 0. Default value is @code{1}.
  3529. @end table
  3530. @anchor{frei0r}
  3531. @section frei0r
  3532. Apply a frei0r effect to the input video.
  3533. To enable compilation of this filter you need to install the frei0r
  3534. header and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-frei0r}.
  3535. This filter accepts the following options:
  3536. @table @option
  3537. @item filter_name
  3538. The name to the frei0r effect to load. If the environment variable
  3539. @env{FREI0R_PATH} is defined, the frei0r effect is searched in each one of the
  3540. directories specified by the colon separated list in @env{FREIOR_PATH},
  3541. otherwise in the standard frei0r paths, which are in this order:
  3542. @file{HOME/.frei0r-1/lib/}, @file{/usr/local/lib/frei0r-1/},
  3543. @file{/usr/lib/frei0r-1/}.
  3544. @item filter_params
  3545. A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r effect.
  3546. @end table
  3547. A frei0r effect parameter can be a boolean (whose values are specified
  3548. with "y" and "n"), a double, a color (specified by the syntax
  3549. @var{R}/@var{G}/@var{B}, (@var{R}, @var{G}, and @var{B} being float
  3550. numbers from 0.0 to 1.0) or by a color description specified in the "Color"
  3551. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual), a position (specified by the syntax @var{X}/@var{Y},
  3552. @var{X} and @var{Y} being float numbers) and a string.
  3553. The number and kind of parameters depend on the loaded effect. If an
  3554. effect parameter is not specified the default value is set.
  3555. @subsection Examples
  3556. @itemize
  3557. @item
  3558. Apply the distort0r effect, set the first two double parameters:
  3559. @example
  3560. frei0r=filter_name=distort0r:filter_params=0.5|0.01
  3561. @end example
  3562. @item
  3563. Apply the colordistance effect, take a color as first parameter:
  3564. @example
  3565. frei0r=colordistance:0.2/0.3/0.4
  3566. frei0r=colordistance:violet
  3567. frei0r=colordistance:0x112233
  3568. @end example
  3569. @item
  3570. Apply the perspective effect, specify the top left and top right image
  3571. positions:
  3572. @example
  3573. frei0r=perspective:0.2/0.2|0.8/0.2
  3574. @end example
  3575. @end itemize
  3576. For more information see:
  3577. @url{http://frei0r.dyne.org}
  3578. @section geq
  3579. The filter accepts the following options:
  3580. @table @option
  3581. @item lum_expr, lum
  3582. Set the luminance expression.
  3583. @item cb_expr, cb
  3584. Set the chrominance blue expression.
  3585. @item cr_expr, cr
  3586. Set the chrominance red expression.
  3587. @item alpha_expr, a
  3588. Set the alpha expression.
  3589. @item red_expr, r
  3590. Set the red expression.
  3591. @item green_expr, g
  3592. Set the green expression.
  3593. @item blue_expr, b
  3594. Set the blue expression.
  3595. @end table
  3596. The colorspace is selected according to the specified options. If one
  3597. of the @option{lum_expr}, @option{cb_expr}, or @option{cr_expr}
  3598. options is specified, the filter will automatically select a YCbCr
  3599. colorspace. If one of the @option{red_expr}, @option{green_expr}, or
  3600. @option{blue_expr} options is specified, it will select an RGB
  3601. colorspace.
  3602. If one of the chrominance expression is not defined, it falls back on the other
  3603. one. If no alpha expression is specified it will evaluate to opaque value.
  3604. If none of chrominance expressions are specified, they will evaluate
  3605. to the luminance expression.
  3606. The expressions can use the following variables and functions:
  3607. @table @option
  3608. @item N
  3609. The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from @code{0}.
  3610. @item X
  3611. @item Y
  3612. The coordinates of the current sample.
  3613. @item W
  3614. @item H
  3615. The width and height of the image.
  3616. @item SW
  3617. @item SH
  3618. Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
  3619. ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
  3620. plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are @code{1,1} for the luma plane, and
  3621. @code{0.5,0.5} for chroma planes.
  3622. @item T
  3623. Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
  3624. @item p(x, y)
  3625. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the current
  3626. plane.
  3627. @item lum(x, y)
  3628. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the luminance
  3629. plane.
  3630. @item cb(x, y)
  3631. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  3632. blue-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  3633. @item cr(x, y)
  3634. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  3635. red-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  3636. @item r(x, y)
  3637. @item g(x, y)
  3638. @item b(x, y)
  3639. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  3640. red/green/blue component. Return 0 if there is no such component.
  3641. @item alpha(x, y)
  3642. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the alpha
  3643. plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  3644. @end table
  3645. For functions, if @var{x} and @var{y} are outside the area, the value will be
  3646. automatically clipped to the closer edge.
  3647. @subsection Examples
  3648. @itemize
  3649. @item
  3650. Flip the image horizontally:
  3651. @example
  3652. geq=p(W-X\,Y)
  3653. @end example
  3654. @item
  3655. Generate a bidimensional sine wave, with angle @code{PI/3} and a
  3656. wavelength of 100 pixels:
  3657. @example
  3658. geq=128 + 100*sin(2*(PI/100)*(cos(PI/3)*(X-50*T) + sin(PI/3)*Y)):128:128
  3659. @end example
  3660. @item
  3661. Generate a fancy enigmatic moving light:
  3662. @example
  3663. nullsrc=s=256x256,geq=random(1)/hypot(X-cos(N*0.07)*W/2-W/2\,Y-sin(N*0.09)*H/2-H/2)^2*1000000*sin(N*0.02):128:128
  3664. @end example
  3665. @item
  3666. Generate a quick emboss effect:
  3667. @example
  3668. format=gray,geq=lum_expr='(p(X,Y)+(256-p(X-4,Y-4)))/2'
  3669. @end example
  3670. @item
  3671. Modify RGB components depending on pixel position:
  3672. @example
  3673. geq=r='X/W*r(X,Y)':g='(1-X/W)*g(X,Y)':b='(H-Y)/H*b(X,Y)'
  3674. @end example
  3675. @end itemize
  3676. @section gradfun
  3677. Fix the banding artifacts that are sometimes introduced into nearly flat
  3678. regions by truncation to 8bit color depth.
  3679. Interpolate the gradients that should go where the bands are, and
  3680. dither them.
  3681. This filter is designed for playback only. Do not use it prior to
  3682. lossy compression, because compression tends to lose the dither and
  3683. bring back the bands.
  3684. This filter accepts the following options:
  3685. @table @option
  3686. @item strength
  3687. The maximum amount by which the filter will change any one pixel. Also the
  3688. threshold for detecting nearly flat regions. Acceptable values range from .51 to
  3689. 64, default value is 1.2, out-of-range values will be clipped to the valid
  3690. range.
  3691. @item radius
  3692. The neighborhood to fit the gradient to. A larger radius makes for smoother
  3693. gradients, but also prevents the filter from modifying the pixels near detailed
  3694. regions. Acceptable values are 8-32, default value is 16, out-of-range values
  3695. will be clipped to the valid range.
  3696. @end table
  3697. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
  3698. @var{strength}[:@var{radius}]
  3699. @subsection Examples
  3700. @itemize
  3701. @item
  3702. Apply the filter with a @code{3.5} strength and radius of @code{8}:
  3703. @example
  3704. gradfun=3.5:8
  3705. @end example
  3706. @item
  3707. Specify radius, omitting the strength (which will fall-back to the default
  3708. value):
  3709. @example
  3710. gradfun=radius=8
  3711. @end example
  3712. @end itemize
  3713. @anchor{haldclut}
  3714. @section haldclut
  3715. Apply a Hald CLUT to a video stream.
  3716. First input is the video stream to process, and second one is the Hald CLUT.
  3717. The Hald CLUT input can be a simple picture or a complete video stream.
  3718. The filter accepts the following options:
  3719. @table @option
  3720. @item shortest
  3721. Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is @code{0}.
  3722. @item repeatlast
  3723. Continue applying the last CLUT after the end of the stream. A value of
  3724. @code{0} disable the filter after the last frame of the CLUT is reached.
  3725. Default is @code{1}.
  3726. @end table
  3727. @code{haldclut} also has the same interpolation options as @ref{lut3d} (both
  3728. filters share the same internals).
  3729. More information about the Hald CLUT can be found on Eskil Steenberg's website
  3730. (Hald CLUT author) at @url{http://www.quelsolaar.com/technology/clut.html}.
  3731. @subsection Workflow examples
  3732. @subsubsection Hald CLUT video stream
  3733. Generate an identity Hald CLUT stream altered with various effects:
  3734. @example
  3735. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i @ref{haldclutsrc}=8 -vf "hue=H=2*PI*t:s=sin(2*PI*t)+1, curves=cross_process" -t 10 -c:v ffv1 clut.nut
  3736. @end example
  3737. Note: make sure you use a lossless codec.
  3738. Then use it with @code{haldclut} to apply it on some random stream:
  3739. @example
  3740. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i mandelbrot -i clut.nut -filter_complex '[0][1] haldclut' -t 20 mandelclut.mkv
  3741. @end example
  3742. The Hald CLUT will be applied to the 10 first seconds (duration of
  3743. @file{clut.nut}), then the latest picture of that CLUT stream will be applied
  3744. to the remaining frames of the @code{mandelbrot} stream.
  3745. @subsubsection Hald CLUT with preview
  3746. A Hald CLUT is supposed to be a squared image of @code{Level*Level*Level} by
  3747. @code{Level*Level*Level} pixels. For a given Hald CLUT, FFmpeg will select the
  3748. biggest possible square starting at the top left of the picture. The remaining
  3749. padding pixels (bottom or right) will be ignored. This area can be used to add
  3750. a preview of the Hald CLUT.
  3751. Typically, the following generated Hald CLUT will be supported by the
  3752. @code{haldclut} filter:
  3753. @example
  3754. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i @ref{haldclutsrc}=8 -vf "
  3755. pad=iw+320 [padded_clut];
  3756. smptebars=s=320x256, split [a][b];
  3757. [padded_clut][a] overlay=W-320:h, curves=color_negative [main];
  3758. [main][b] overlay=W-320" -frames:v 1 clut.png
  3759. @end example
  3760. It contains the original and a preview of the effect of the CLUT: SMPTE color
  3761. bars are displayed on the right-top, and below the same color bars processed by
  3762. the color changes.
  3763. Then, the effect of this Hald CLUT can be visualized with:
  3764. @example
  3765. ffplay input.mkv -vf "movie=clut.png, [in] haldclut"
  3766. @end example
  3767. @section hflip
  3768. Flip the input video horizontally.
  3769. For example to horizontally flip the input video with @command{ffmpeg}:
  3770. @example
  3771. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "hflip" out.avi
  3772. @end example
  3773. @section histeq
  3774. This filter applies a global color histogram equalization on a
  3775. per-frame basis.
  3776. It can be used to correct video that has a compressed range of pixel
  3777. intensities. The filter redistributes the pixel intensities to
  3778. equalize their distribution across the intensity range. It may be
  3779. viewed as an "automatically adjusting contrast filter". This filter is
  3780. useful only for correcting degraded or poorly captured source
  3781. video.
  3782. The filter accepts the following options:
  3783. @table @option
  3784. @item strength
  3785. Determine the amount of equalization to be applied. As the strength
  3786. is reduced, the distribution of pixel intensities more-and-more
  3787. approaches that of the input frame. The value must be a float number
  3788. in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.200.
  3789. @item intensity
  3790. Set the maximum intensity that can generated and scale the output
  3791. values appropriately. The strength should be set as desired and then
  3792. the intensity can be limited if needed to avoid washing-out. The value
  3793. must be a float number in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.210.
  3794. @item antibanding
  3795. Set the antibanding level. If enabled the filter will randomly vary
  3796. the luminance of output pixels by a small amount to avoid banding of
  3797. the histogram. Possible values are @code{none}, @code{weak} or
  3798. @code{strong}. It defaults to @code{none}.
  3799. @end table
  3800. @section histogram
  3801. Compute and draw a color distribution histogram for the input video.
  3802. The computed histogram is a representation of the color component
  3803. distribution in an image.
  3804. The filter accepts the following options:
  3805. @table @option
  3806. @item mode
  3807. Set histogram mode.
  3808. It accepts the following values:
  3809. @table @samp
  3810. @item levels
  3811. Standard histogram that displays the color components distribution in an
  3812. image. Displays color graph for each color component. Shows distribution of
  3813. the Y, U, V, A or R, G, B components, depending on input format, in the
  3814. current frame. Below each graph a color component scale meter is shown.
  3815. @item color
  3816. Displays chroma values (U/V color placement) in a two dimensional
  3817. graph (which is called a vectorscope). The brighter a pixel in the
  3818. vectorscope, the more pixels of the input frame correspond to that pixel
  3819. (i.e., more pixels have this chroma value). The V component is displayed on
  3820. the horizontal (X) axis, with the leftmost side being V = 0 and the rightmost
  3821. side being V = 255. The U component is displayed on the vertical (Y) axis,
  3822. with the top representing U = 0 and the bottom representing U = 255.
  3823. The position of a white pixel in the graph corresponds to the chroma value of
  3824. a pixel of the input clip. The graph can therefore be used to read the hue
  3825. (color flavor) and the saturation (the dominance of the hue in the color). As
  3826. the hue of a color changes, it moves around the square. At the center of the
  3827. square the saturation is zero, which means that the corresponding pixel has no
  3828. color. If the amount of a specific color is increased (while leaving the other
  3829. colors unchanged) the saturation increases, and the indicator moves towards
  3830. the edge of the square.
  3831. @item color2
  3832. Chroma values in vectorscope, similar as @code{color} but actual chroma values
  3833. are displayed.
  3834. @item waveform
  3835. Per row/column color component graph. In row mode, the graph on the left side
  3836. represents color component value 0 and the right side represents value = 255.
  3837. In column mode, the top side represents color component value = 0 and bottom
  3838. side represents value = 255.
  3839. @end table
  3840. Default value is @code{levels}.
  3841. @item level_height
  3842. Set height of level in @code{levels}. Default value is @code{200}.
  3843. Allowed range is [50, 2048].
  3844. @item scale_height
  3845. Set height of color scale in @code{levels}. Default value is @code{12}.
  3846. Allowed range is [0, 40].
  3847. @item step
  3848. Set step for @code{waveform} mode. Smaller values are useful to find out how
  3849. many values of the same luminance are distributed across input rows/columns.
  3850. Default value is @code{10}. Allowed range is [1, 255].
  3851. @item waveform_mode
  3852. Set mode for @code{waveform}. Can be either @code{row}, or @code{column}.
  3853. Default is @code{row}.
  3854. @item waveform_mirror
  3855. Set mirroring mode for @code{waveform}. @code{0} means unmirrored, @code{1}
  3856. means mirrored. In mirrored mode, higher values will be represented on the left
  3857. side for @code{row} mode and at the top for @code{column} mode. Default is
  3858. @code{0} (unmirrored).
  3859. @item display_mode
  3860. Set display mode for @code{waveform} and @code{levels}.
  3861. It accepts the following values:
  3862. @table @samp
  3863. @item parade
  3864. Display separate graph for the color components side by side in
  3865. @code{row} waveform mode or one below the other in @code{column} waveform mode
  3866. for @code{waveform} histogram mode. For @code{levels} histogram mode,
  3867. per color component graphs are placed below each other.
  3868. Using this display mode in @code{waveform} histogram mode makes it easy to
  3869. spot color casts in the highlights and shadows of an image, by comparing the
  3870. contours of the top and the bottom graphs of each waveform. Since whites,
  3871. grays, and blacks are characterized by exactly equal amounts of red, green,
  3872. and blue, neutral areas of the picture should display three waveforms of
  3873. roughly equal width/height. If not, the correction is easy to perform by
  3874. making level adjustments the three waveforms.
  3875. @item overlay
  3876. Presents information identical to that in the @code{parade}, except
  3877. that the graphs representing color components are superimposed directly
  3878. over one another.
  3879. This display mode in @code{waveform} histogram mode makes it easier to spot
  3880. relative differences or similarities in overlapping areas of the color
  3881. components that are supposed to be identical, such as neutral whites, grays,
  3882. or blacks.
  3883. @end table
  3884. Default is @code{parade}.
  3885. @item levels_mode
  3886. Set mode for @code{levels}. Can be either @code{linear}, or @code{logarithmic}.
  3887. Default is @code{linear}.
  3888. @end table
  3889. @subsection Examples
  3890. @itemize
  3891. @item
  3892. Calculate and draw histogram:
  3893. @example
  3894. ffplay -i input -vf histogram
  3895. @end example
  3896. @end itemize
  3897. @anchor{hqdn3d}
  3898. @section hqdn3d
  3899. High precision/quality 3d denoise filter. This filter aims to reduce
  3900. image noise producing smooth images and making still images really
  3901. still. It should enhance compressibility.
  3902. It accepts the following optional parameters:
  3903. @table @option
  3904. @item luma_spatial
  3905. a non-negative float number which specifies spatial luma strength,
  3906. defaults to 4.0
  3907. @item chroma_spatial
  3908. a non-negative float number which specifies spatial chroma strength,
  3909. defaults to 3.0*@var{luma_spatial}/4.0
  3910. @item luma_tmp
  3911. a float number which specifies luma temporal strength, defaults to
  3912. 6.0*@var{luma_spatial}/4.0
  3913. @item chroma_tmp
  3914. a float number which specifies chroma temporal strength, defaults to
  3915. @var{luma_tmp}*@var{chroma_spatial}/@var{luma_spatial}
  3916. @end table
  3917. @section hue
  3918. Modify the hue and/or the saturation of the input.
  3919. This filter accepts the following options:
  3920. @table @option
  3921. @item h
  3922. Specify the hue angle as a number of degrees. It accepts an expression,
  3923. and defaults to "0".
  3924. @item s
  3925. Specify the saturation in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
  3926. defaults to "1".
  3927. @item H
  3928. Specify the hue angle as a number of radians. It accepts an
  3929. expression, and defaults to "0".
  3930. @item b
  3931. Specify the brightness in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
  3932. defaults to "0".
  3933. @end table
  3934. @option{h} and @option{H} are mutually exclusive, and can't be
  3935. specified at the same time.
  3936. The @option{b}, @option{h}, @option{H} and @option{s} option values are
  3937. expressions containing the following constants:
  3938. @table @option
  3939. @item n
  3940. frame count of the input frame starting from 0
  3941. @item pts
  3942. presentation timestamp of the input frame expressed in time base units
  3943. @item r
  3944. frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
  3945. @item t
  3946. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  3947. @item tb
  3948. time base of the input video
  3949. @end table
  3950. @subsection Examples
  3951. @itemize
  3952. @item
  3953. Set the hue to 90 degrees and the saturation to 1.0:
  3954. @example
  3955. hue=h=90:s=1
  3956. @end example
  3957. @item
  3958. Same command but expressing the hue in radians:
  3959. @example
  3960. hue=H=PI/2:s=1
  3961. @end example
  3962. @item
  3963. Rotate hue and make the saturation swing between 0
  3964. and 2 over a period of 1 second:
  3965. @example
  3966. hue="H=2*PI*t: s=sin(2*PI*t)+1"
  3967. @end example
  3968. @item
  3969. Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-in effect starting at 0:
  3970. @example
  3971. hue="s=min(t/3\,1)"
  3972. @end example
  3973. The general fade-in expression can be written as:
  3974. @example
  3975. hue="s=min(0\, max((t-START)/DURATION\, 1))"
  3976. @end example
  3977. @item
  3978. Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-out effect starting at 5 seconds:
  3979. @example
  3980. hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (8-t)/3))"
  3981. @end example
  3982. The general fade-out expression can be written as:
  3983. @example
  3984. hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (START+DURATION-t)/DURATION))"
  3985. @end example
  3986. @end itemize
  3987. @subsection Commands
  3988. This filter supports the following commands:
  3989. @table @option
  3990. @item b
  3991. @item s
  3992. @item h
  3993. @item H
  3994. Modify the hue and/or the saturation and/or brightness of the input video.
  3995. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  3996. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  3997. value.
  3998. @end table
  3999. @section idet
  4000. Detect video interlacing type.
  4001. This filter tries to detect if the input is interlaced or progressive,
  4002. top or bottom field first.
  4003. The filter accepts the following options:
  4004. @table @option
  4005. @item intl_thres
  4006. Set interlacing threshold.
  4007. @item prog_thres
  4008. Set progressive threshold.
  4009. @end table
  4010. @section il
  4011. Deinterleave or interleave fields.
  4012. This filter allows to process interlaced images fields without
  4013. deinterlacing them. Deinterleaving splits the input frame into 2
  4014. fields (so called half pictures). Odd lines are moved to the top
  4015. half of the output image, even lines to the bottom half.
  4016. You can process (filter) them independently and then re-interleave them.
  4017. The filter accepts the following options:
  4018. @table @option
  4019. @item luma_mode, l
  4020. @item chroma_mode, c
  4021. @item alpha_mode, a
  4022. Available values for @var{luma_mode}, @var{chroma_mode} and
  4023. @var{alpha_mode} are:
  4024. @table @samp
  4025. @item none
  4026. Do nothing.
  4027. @item deinterleave, d
  4028. Deinterleave fields, placing one above the other.
  4029. @item interleave, i
  4030. Interleave fields. Reverse the effect of deinterleaving.
  4031. @end table
  4032. Default value is @code{none}.
  4033. @item luma_swap, ls
  4034. @item chroma_swap, cs
  4035. @item alpha_swap, as
  4036. Swap luma/chroma/alpha fields. Exchange even & odd lines. Default value is @code{0}.
  4037. @end table
  4038. @section interlace
  4039. Simple interlacing filter from progressive contents. This interleaves upper (or
  4040. lower) lines from odd frames with lower (or upper) lines from even frames,
  4041. halving the frame rate and preserving image height. A vertical lowpass filter
  4042. is always applied in order to avoid twitter effects and reduce moiré patterns.
  4043. @example
  4044. Original Original New Frame
  4045. Frame 'j' Frame 'j+1' (tff)
  4046. ========== =========== ==================
  4047. Line 0 --------------------> Frame 'j' Line 0
  4048. Line 1 Line 1 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 1
  4049. Line 2 ---------------------> Frame 'j' Line 2
  4050. Line 3 Line 3 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 3
  4051. ... ... ...
  4052. New Frame + 1 will be generated by Frame 'j+2' and Frame 'j+3' and so on
  4053. @end example
  4054. It accepts the following optional parameters:
  4055. @table @option
  4056. @item scan
  4057. determines whether the interlaced frame is taken from the even (tff - default)
  4058. or odd (bff) lines of the progressive frame.
  4059. @end table
  4060. @section kerndeint
  4061. Deinterlace input video by applying Donald Graft's adaptive kernel
  4062. deinterling. Work on interlaced parts of a video to produce
  4063. progressive frames.
  4064. The description of the accepted parameters follows.
  4065. @table @option
  4066. @item thresh
  4067. Set the threshold which affects the filter's tolerance when
  4068. determining if a pixel line must be processed. It must be an integer
  4069. in the range [0,255] and defaults to 10. A value of 0 will result in
  4070. applying the process on every pixels.
  4071. @item map
  4072. Paint pixels exceeding the threshold value to white if set to 1.
  4073. Default is 0.
  4074. @item order
  4075. Set the fields order. Swap fields if set to 1, leave fields alone if
  4076. 0. Default is 0.
  4077. @item sharp
  4078. Enable additional sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
  4079. @item twoway
  4080. Enable twoway sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
  4081. @end table
  4082. @subsection Examples
  4083. @itemize
  4084. @item
  4085. Apply default values:
  4086. @example
  4087. kerndeint=thresh=10:map=0:order=0:sharp=0:twoway=0
  4088. @end example
  4089. @item
  4090. Enable additional sharpening:
  4091. @example
  4092. kerndeint=sharp=1
  4093. @end example
  4094. @item
  4095. Paint processed pixels in white:
  4096. @example
  4097. kerndeint=map=1
  4098. @end example
  4099. @end itemize
  4100. @anchor{lut3d}
  4101. @section lut3d
  4102. Apply a 3D LUT to an input video.
  4103. The filter accepts the following options:
  4104. @table @option
  4105. @item file
  4106. Set the 3D LUT file name.
  4107. Currently supported formats:
  4108. @table @samp
  4109. @item 3dl
  4110. AfterEffects
  4111. @item cube
  4112. Iridas
  4113. @item dat
  4114. DaVinci
  4115. @item m3d
  4116. Pandora
  4117. @end table
  4118. @item interp
  4119. Select interpolation mode.
  4120. Available values are:
  4121. @table @samp
  4122. @item nearest
  4123. Use values from the nearest defined point.
  4124. @item trilinear
  4125. Interpolate values using the 8 points defining a cube.
  4126. @item tetrahedral
  4127. Interpolate values using a tetrahedron.
  4128. @end table
  4129. @end table
  4130. @section lut, lutrgb, lutyuv
  4131. Compute a look-up table for binding each pixel component input value
  4132. to an output value, and apply it to input video.
  4133. @var{lutyuv} applies a lookup table to a YUV input video, @var{lutrgb}
  4134. to an RGB input video.
  4135. These filters accept the following options:
  4136. @table @option
  4137. @item c0
  4138. set first pixel component expression
  4139. @item c1
  4140. set second pixel component expression
  4141. @item c2
  4142. set third pixel component expression
  4143. @item c3
  4144. set fourth pixel component expression, corresponds to the alpha component
  4145. @item r
  4146. set red component expression
  4147. @item g
  4148. set green component expression
  4149. @item b
  4150. set blue component expression
  4151. @item a
  4152. alpha component expression
  4153. @item y
  4154. set Y/luminance component expression
  4155. @item u
  4156. set U/Cb component expression
  4157. @item v
  4158. set V/Cr component expression
  4159. @end table
  4160. Each of them specifies the expression to use for computing the lookup table for
  4161. the corresponding pixel component values.
  4162. The exact component associated to each of the @var{c*} options depends on the
  4163. format in input.
  4164. The @var{lut} filter requires either YUV or RGB pixel formats in input,
  4165. @var{lutrgb} requires RGB pixel formats in input, and @var{lutyuv} requires YUV.
  4166. The expressions can contain the following constants and functions:
  4167. @table @option
  4168. @item w
  4169. @item h
  4170. the input width and height
  4171. @item val
  4172. input value for the pixel component
  4173. @item clipval
  4174. the input value clipped in the @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range
  4175. @item maxval
  4176. maximum value for the pixel component
  4177. @item minval
  4178. minimum value for the pixel component
  4179. @item negval
  4180. the negated value for the pixel component value clipped in the
  4181. @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range , it corresponds to the expression
  4182. "maxval-clipval+minval"
  4183. @item clip(val)
  4184. the computed value in @var{val} clipped in the
  4185. @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range
  4186. @item gammaval(gamma)
  4187. the computed gamma correction value of the pixel component value
  4188. clipped in the @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range, corresponds to the
  4189. expression
  4190. "pow((clipval-minval)/(maxval-minval)\,@var{gamma})*(maxval-minval)+minval"
  4191. @end table
  4192. All expressions default to "val".
  4193. @subsection Examples
  4194. @itemize
  4195. @item
  4196. Negate input video:
  4197. @example
  4198. lutrgb="r=maxval+minval-val:g=maxval+minval-val:b=maxval+minval-val"
  4199. lutyuv="y=maxval+minval-val:u=maxval+minval-val:v=maxval+minval-val"
  4200. @end example
  4201. The above is the same as:
  4202. @example
  4203. lutrgb="r=negval:g=negval:b=negval"
  4204. lutyuv="y=negval:u=negval:v=negval"
  4205. @end example
  4206. @item
  4207. Negate luminance:
  4208. @example
  4209. lutyuv=y=negval
  4210. @end example
  4211. @item
  4212. Remove chroma components, turns the video into a graytone image:
  4213. @example
  4214. lutyuv="u=128:v=128"
  4215. @end example
  4216. @item
  4217. Apply a luma burning effect:
  4218. @example
  4219. lutyuv="y=2*val"
  4220. @end example
  4221. @item
  4222. Remove green and blue components:
  4223. @example
  4224. lutrgb="g=0:b=0"
  4225. @end example
  4226. @item
  4227. Set a constant alpha channel value on input:
  4228. @example
  4229. format=rgba,lutrgb=a="maxval-minval/2"
  4230. @end example
  4231. @item
  4232. Correct luminance gamma by a 0.5 factor:
  4233. @example
  4234. lutyuv=y=gammaval(0.5)
  4235. @end example
  4236. @item
  4237. Discard least significant bits of luma:
  4238. @example
  4239. lutyuv=y='bitand(val, 128+64+32)'
  4240. @end example
  4241. @end itemize
  4242. @section mergeplanes
  4243. Merge color channel components from several video streams.
  4244. The filter accepts up to 4 input streams, and merge selected input
  4245. planes to the output video.
  4246. This filter accepts the following options:
  4247. @table @option
  4248. @item mapping
  4249. Set input to output plane mapping. Default is @code{0}.
  4250. The mappings is specified as a bitmap. It should be specified as a
  4251. hexadecimal number in the form 0xAa[Bb[Cc[Dd]]]. 'Aa' describes the
  4252. mapping for the first plane of the output stream. 'A' sets the number of
  4253. the input stream to use (from 0 to 3), and 'a' the plane number of the
  4254. corresponding input to use (from 0 to 3). The rest of the mappings is
  4255. similar, 'Bb' describes the mapping for the output stream second
  4256. plane, 'Cc' describes the mapping for the output stream third plane and
  4257. 'Dd' describes the mapping for the output stream fourth plane.
  4258. @item format
  4259. Set output pixel format. Default is @code{yuva444p}.
  4260. @end table
  4261. @subsection Examples
  4262. @itemize
  4263. @item
  4264. Merge three gray video streams of same width and height into single video stream:
  4265. @example
  4266. [a0][a1][a2]mergeplanes=0x001020:yuv444p
  4267. @end example
  4268. @item
  4269. Merge 1st yuv444p stream and 2nd gray video stream into yuva444p video stream:
  4270. @example
  4271. [a0][a1]mergeplanes=0x00010210:yuva444p
  4272. @end example
  4273. @item
  4274. Swap Y and A plane in yuva444p stream:
  4275. @example
  4276. format=yuva444p,mergeplanes=0x03010200:yuva444p
  4277. @end example
  4278. @item
  4279. Swap U and V plane in yuv420p stream:
  4280. @example
  4281. format=yuv420p,mergeplanes=0x000201:yuv420p
  4282. @end example
  4283. @item
  4284. Cast a rgb24 clip to yuv444p:
  4285. @example
  4286. format=rgb24,mergeplanes=0x000102:yuv444p
  4287. @end example
  4288. @end itemize
  4289. @section mcdeint
  4290. Apply motion-compensation deinterlacing.
  4291. It needs one field per frame as input and must thus be used together
  4292. with yadif=1/3 or equivalent.
  4293. This filter accepts the following options:
  4294. @table @option
  4295. @item mode
  4296. Set the deinterlacing mode.
  4297. It accepts one of the following values:
  4298. @table @samp
  4299. @item fast
  4300. @item medium
  4301. @item slow
  4302. use iterative motion estimation
  4303. @item extra_slow
  4304. like @samp{slow}, but use multiple reference frames.
  4305. @end table
  4306. Default value is @samp{fast}.
  4307. @item parity
  4308. Set the picture field parity assumed for the input video. It must be
  4309. one of the following values:
  4310. @table @samp
  4311. @item 0, tff
  4312. assume top field first
  4313. @item 1, bff
  4314. assume bottom field first
  4315. @end table
  4316. Default value is @samp{bff}.
  4317. @item qp
  4318. Set per-block quantization parameter (QP) used by the internal
  4319. encoder.
  4320. Higher values should result in a smoother motion vector field but less
  4321. optimal individual vectors. Default value is 1.
  4322. @end table
  4323. @section mp
  4324. Apply an MPlayer filter to the input video.
  4325. This filter provides a wrapper around some of the filters of
  4326. MPlayer/MEncoder.
  4327. This wrapper is considered experimental. Some of the wrapped filters
  4328. may not work properly and we may drop support for them, as they will
  4329. be implemented natively into FFmpeg. Thus you should avoid
  4330. depending on them when writing portable scripts.
  4331. The filter accepts the parameters:
  4332. @var{filter_name}[:=]@var{filter_params}
  4333. @var{filter_name} is the name of a supported MPlayer filter,
  4334. @var{filter_params} is a string containing the parameters accepted by
  4335. the named filter.
  4336. The list of the currently supported filters follows:
  4337. @table @var
  4338. @item eq2
  4339. @item eq
  4340. @item fspp
  4341. @item ilpack
  4342. @item pp7
  4343. @item softpulldown
  4344. @item uspp
  4345. @end table
  4346. The parameter syntax and behavior for the listed filters are the same
  4347. of the corresponding MPlayer filters. For detailed instructions check
  4348. the "VIDEO FILTERS" section in the MPlayer manual.
  4349. @subsection Examples
  4350. @itemize
  4351. @item
  4352. Adjust gamma, brightness, contrast:
  4353. @example
  4354. mp=eq2=1.0:2:0.5
  4355. @end example
  4356. @end itemize
  4357. See also mplayer(1), @url{http://www.mplayerhq.hu/}.
  4358. @section mpdecimate
  4359. Drop frames that do not differ greatly from the previous frame in
  4360. order to reduce frame rate.
  4361. The main use of this filter is for very-low-bitrate encoding
  4362. (e.g. streaming over dialup modem), but it could in theory be used for
  4363. fixing movies that were inverse-telecined incorrectly.
  4364. A description of the accepted options follows.
  4365. @table @option
  4366. @item max
  4367. Set the maximum number of consecutive frames which can be dropped (if
  4368. positive), or the minimum interval between dropped frames (if
  4369. negative). If the value is 0, the frame is dropped unregarding the
  4370. number of previous sequentially dropped frames.
  4371. Default value is 0.
  4372. @item hi
  4373. @item lo
  4374. @item frac
  4375. Set the dropping threshold values.
  4376. Values for @option{hi} and @option{lo} are for 8x8 pixel blocks and
  4377. represent actual pixel value differences, so a threshold of 64
  4378. corresponds to 1 unit of difference for each pixel, or the same spread
  4379. out differently over the block.
  4380. A frame is a candidate for dropping if no 8x8 blocks differ by more
  4381. than a threshold of @option{hi}, and if no more than @option{frac} blocks (1
  4382. meaning the whole image) differ by more than a threshold of @option{lo}.
  4383. Default value for @option{hi} is 64*12, default value for @option{lo} is
  4384. 64*5, and default value for @option{frac} is 0.33.
  4385. @end table
  4386. @section negate
  4387. Negate input video.
  4388. This filter accepts an integer in input, if non-zero it negates the
  4389. alpha component (if available). The default value in input is 0.
  4390. @section noformat
  4391. Force libavfilter not to use any of the specified pixel formats for the
  4392. input to the next filter.
  4393. This filter accepts the following parameters:
  4394. @table @option
  4395. @item pix_fmts
  4396. A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, for example
  4397. "pix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
  4398. @end table
  4399. @subsection Examples
  4400. @itemize
  4401. @item
  4402. Force libavfilter to use a format different from @var{yuv420p} for the
  4403. input to the vflip filter:
  4404. @example
  4405. noformat=pix_fmts=yuv420p,vflip
  4406. @end example
  4407. @item
  4408. Convert the input video to any of the formats not contained in the list:
  4409. @example
  4410. noformat=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
  4411. @end example
  4412. @end itemize
  4413. @section noise
  4414. Add noise on video input frame.
  4415. The filter accepts the following options:
  4416. @table @option
  4417. @item all_seed
  4418. @item c0_seed
  4419. @item c1_seed
  4420. @item c2_seed
  4421. @item c3_seed
  4422. Set noise seed for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  4423. of @var{all_seed}. Default value is @code{123457}.
  4424. @item all_strength, alls
  4425. @item c0_strength, c0s
  4426. @item c1_strength, c1s
  4427. @item c2_strength, c2s
  4428. @item c3_strength, c3s
  4429. Set noise strength for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  4430. @var{all_strength}. Default value is @code{0}. Allowed range is [0, 100].
  4431. @item all_flags, allf
  4432. @item c0_flags, c0f
  4433. @item c1_flags, c1f
  4434. @item c2_flags, c2f
  4435. @item c3_flags, c3f
  4436. Set pixel component flags or set flags for all components if @var{all_flags}.
  4437. Available values for component flags are:
  4438. @table @samp
  4439. @item a
  4440. averaged temporal noise (smoother)
  4441. @item p
  4442. mix random noise with a (semi)regular pattern
  4443. @item t
  4444. temporal noise (noise pattern changes between frames)
  4445. @item u
  4446. uniform noise (gaussian otherwise)
  4447. @end table
  4448. @end table
  4449. @subsection Examples
  4450. Add temporal and uniform noise to input video:
  4451. @example
  4452. noise=alls=20:allf=t+u
  4453. @end example
  4454. @section null
  4455. Pass the video source unchanged to the output.
  4456. @section ocv
  4457. Apply video transform using libopencv.
  4458. To enable this filter install libopencv library and headers and
  4459. configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libopencv}.
  4460. This filter accepts the following parameters:
  4461. @table @option
  4462. @item filter_name
  4463. The name of the libopencv filter to apply.
  4464. @item filter_params
  4465. The parameters to pass to the libopencv filter. If not specified the default
  4466. values are assumed.
  4467. @end table
  4468. Refer to the official libopencv documentation for more precise
  4469. information:
  4470. @url{http://opencv.willowgarage.com/documentation/c/image_filtering.html}
  4471. Follows the list of supported libopencv filters.
  4472. @anchor{dilate}
  4473. @subsection dilate
  4474. Dilate an image by using a specific structuring element.
  4475. This filter corresponds to the libopencv function @code{cvDilate}.
  4476. It accepts the parameters: @var{struct_el}|@var{nb_iterations}.
  4477. @var{struct_el} represents a structuring element, and has the syntax:
  4478. @var{cols}x@var{rows}+@var{anchor_x}x@var{anchor_y}/@var{shape}
  4479. @var{cols} and @var{rows} represent the number of columns and rows of
  4480. the structuring element, @var{anchor_x} and @var{anchor_y} the anchor
  4481. point, and @var{shape} the shape for the structuring element, and
  4482. can be one of the values "rect", "cross", "ellipse", "custom".
  4483. If the value for @var{shape} is "custom", it must be followed by a
  4484. string of the form "=@var{filename}". The file with name
  4485. @var{filename} is assumed to represent a binary image, with each
  4486. printable character corresponding to a bright pixel. When a custom
  4487. @var{shape} is used, @var{cols} and @var{rows} are ignored, the number
  4488. or columns and rows of the read file are assumed instead.
  4489. The default value for @var{struct_el} is "3x3+0x0/rect".
  4490. @var{nb_iterations} specifies the number of times the transform is
  4491. applied to the image, and defaults to 1.
  4492. Follow some example:
  4493. @example
  4494. # use the default values
  4495. ocv=dilate
  4496. # dilate using a structuring element with a 5x5 cross, iterate two times
  4497. ocv=filter_name=dilate:filter_params=5x5+2x2/cross|2
  4498. # read the shape from the file diamond.shape, iterate two times
  4499. # the file diamond.shape may contain a pattern of characters like this:
  4500. # *
  4501. # ***
  4502. # *****
  4503. # ***
  4504. # *
  4505. # the specified cols and rows are ignored (but not the anchor point coordinates)
  4506. ocv=dilate:0x0+2x2/custom=diamond.shape|2
  4507. @end example
  4508. @subsection erode
  4509. Erode an image by using a specific structuring element.
  4510. This filter corresponds to the libopencv function @code{cvErode}.
  4511. The filter accepts the parameters: @var{struct_el}:@var{nb_iterations},
  4512. with the same syntax and semantics as the @ref{dilate} filter.
  4513. @subsection smooth
  4514. Smooth the input video.
  4515. The filter takes the following parameters:
  4516. @var{type}|@var{param1}|@var{param2}|@var{param3}|@var{param4}.
  4517. @var{type} is the type of smooth filter to apply, and can be one of
  4518. the following values: "blur", "blur_no_scale", "median", "gaussian",
  4519. "bilateral". The default value is "gaussian".
  4520. @var{param1}, @var{param2}, @var{param3}, and @var{param4} are
  4521. parameters whose meanings depend on smooth type. @var{param1} and
  4522. @var{param2} accept integer positive values or 0, @var{param3} and
  4523. @var{param4} accept float values.
  4524. The default value for @var{param1} is 3, the default value for the
  4525. other parameters is 0.
  4526. These parameters correspond to the parameters assigned to the
  4527. libopencv function @code{cvSmooth}.
  4528. @anchor{overlay}
  4529. @section overlay
  4530. Overlay one video on top of another.
  4531. It takes two inputs and one output, the first input is the "main"
  4532. video on which the second input is overlayed.
  4533. This filter accepts the following parameters:
  4534. A description of the accepted options follows.
  4535. @table @option
  4536. @item x
  4537. @item y
  4538. Set the expression for the x and y coordinates of the overlayed video
  4539. on the main video. Default value is "0" for both expressions. In case
  4540. the expression is invalid, it is set to a huge value (meaning that the
  4541. overlay will not be displayed within the output visible area).
  4542. @item eof_action
  4543. The action to take when EOF is encountered on the secondary input, accepts one
  4544. of the following values:
  4545. @table @option
  4546. @item repeat
  4547. repeat the last frame (the default)
  4548. @item endall
  4549. end both streams
  4550. @item pass
  4551. pass through the main input
  4552. @end table
  4553. @item eval
  4554. Set when the expressions for @option{x}, and @option{y} are evaluated.
  4555. It accepts the following values:
  4556. @table @samp
  4557. @item init
  4558. only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or
  4559. when a command is processed
  4560. @item frame
  4561. evaluate expressions for each incoming frame
  4562. @end table
  4563. Default value is @samp{frame}.
  4564. @item shortest
  4565. If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input
  4566. terminates. Default value is 0.
  4567. @item format
  4568. Set the format for the output video.
  4569. It accepts the following values:
  4570. @table @samp
  4571. @item yuv420
  4572. force YUV420 output
  4573. @item yuv422
  4574. force YUV422 output
  4575. @item yuv444
  4576. force YUV444 output
  4577. @item rgb
  4578. force RGB output
  4579. @end table
  4580. Default value is @samp{yuv420}.
  4581. @item rgb @emph{(deprecated)}
  4582. If set to 1, force the filter to accept inputs in the RGB
  4583. color space. Default value is 0. This option is deprecated, use
  4584. @option{format} instead.
  4585. @item repeatlast
  4586. If set to 1, force the filter to draw the last overlay frame over the
  4587. main input until the end of the stream. A value of 0 disables this
  4588. behavior. Default value is 1.
  4589. @end table
  4590. The @option{x}, and @option{y} expressions can contain the following
  4591. parameters.
  4592. @table @option
  4593. @item main_w, W
  4594. @item main_h, H
  4595. main input width and height
  4596. @item overlay_w, w
  4597. @item overlay_h, h
  4598. overlay input width and height
  4599. @item x
  4600. @item y
  4601. the computed values for @var{x} and @var{y}. They are evaluated for
  4602. each new frame.
  4603. @item hsub
  4604. @item vsub
  4605. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values of the output
  4606. format. For example for the pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and
  4607. @var{vsub} is 1.
  4608. @item n
  4609. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  4610. @item pos
  4611. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  4612. @item t
  4613. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  4614. @end table
  4615. Note that the @var{n}, @var{pos}, @var{t} variables are available only
  4616. when evaluation is done @emph{per frame}, and will evaluate to NAN
  4617. when @option{eval} is set to @samp{init}.
  4618. Be aware that frames are taken from each input video in timestamp
  4619. order, hence, if their initial timestamps differ, it is a good idea
  4620. to pass the two inputs through a @var{setpts=PTS-STARTPTS} filter to
  4621. have them begin in the same zero timestamp, as it does the example for
  4622. the @var{movie} filter.
  4623. You can chain together more overlays but you should test the
  4624. efficiency of such approach.
  4625. @subsection Commands
  4626. This filter supports the following commands:
  4627. @table @option
  4628. @item x
  4629. @item y
  4630. Modify the x and y of the overlay input.
  4631. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  4632. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  4633. value.
  4634. @end table
  4635. @subsection Examples
  4636. @itemize
  4637. @item
  4638. Draw the overlay at 10 pixels from the bottom right corner of the main
  4639. video:
  4640. @example
  4641. overlay=main_w-overlay_w-10:main_h-overlay_h-10
  4642. @end example
  4643. Using named options the example above becomes:
  4644. @example
  4645. overlay=x=main_w-overlay_w-10:y=main_h-overlay_h-10
  4646. @end example
  4647. @item
  4648. Insert a transparent PNG logo in the bottom left corner of the input,
  4649. using the @command{ffmpeg} tool with the @code{-filter_complex} option:
  4650. @example
  4651. ffmpeg -i input -i logo -filter_complex 'overlay=10:main_h-overlay_h-10' output
  4652. @end example
  4653. @item
  4654. Insert 2 different transparent PNG logos (second logo on bottom
  4655. right corner) using the @command{ffmpeg} tool:
  4656. @example
  4657. ffmpeg -i input -i logo1 -i logo2 -filter_complex 'overlay=x=10:y=H-h-10,overlay=x=W-w-10:y=H-h-10' output
  4658. @end example
  4659. @item
  4660. Add a transparent color layer on top of the main video, @code{WxH}
  4661. must specify the size of the main input to the overlay filter:
  4662. @example
  4663. color=color=red@@.3:size=WxH [over]; [in][over] overlay [out]
  4664. @end example
  4665. @item
  4666. Play an original video and a filtered version (here with the deshake
  4667. filter) side by side using the @command{ffplay} tool:
  4668. @example
  4669. ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[a][b]; [a]pad=iw*2:ih[src]; [b]deshake[filt]; [src][filt]overlay=w'
  4670. @end example
  4671. The above command is the same as:
  4672. @example
  4673. ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[b], pad=iw*2[src], [b]deshake, [src]overlay=w'
  4674. @end example
  4675. @item
  4676. Make a sliding overlay appearing from the left to the right top part of the
  4677. screen starting since time 2:
  4678. @example
  4679. overlay=x='if(gte(t,2), -w+(t-2)*20, NAN)':y=0
  4680. @end example
  4681. @item
  4682. Compose output by putting two input videos side to side:
  4683. @example
  4684. ffmpeg -i left.avi -i right.avi -filter_complex "
  4685. nullsrc=size=200x100 [background];
  4686. [0:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [left];
  4687. [1:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [right];
  4688. [background][left] overlay=shortest=1 [background+left];
  4689. [background+left][right] overlay=shortest=1:x=100 [left+right]
  4690. "
  4691. @end example
  4692. @item
  4693. mask 10-20 seconds of a video by applying the delogo filter to a section
  4694. @example
  4695. ffmpeg -i test.avi -codec:v:0 wmv2 -ar 11025 -b:v 9000k
  4696. -vf '[in]split[split_main][split_delogo];[split_delogo]trim=start=360:end=371,delogo=0:0:640:480[delogoed];[split_main][delogoed]overlay=eof_action=pass[out]'
  4697. masked.avi
  4698. @end example
  4699. @item
  4700. Chain several overlays in cascade:
  4701. @example
  4702. nullsrc=s=200x200 [bg];
  4703. testsrc=s=100x100, split=4 [in0][in1][in2][in3];
  4704. [in0] lutrgb=r=0, [bg] overlay=0:0 [mid0];
  4705. [in1] lutrgb=g=0, [mid0] overlay=100:0 [mid1];
  4706. [in2] lutrgb=b=0, [mid1] overlay=0:100 [mid2];
  4707. [in3] null, [mid2] overlay=100:100 [out0]
  4708. @end example
  4709. @end itemize
  4710. @section owdenoise
  4711. Apply Overcomplete Wavelet denoiser.
  4712. The filter accepts the following options:
  4713. @table @option
  4714. @item depth
  4715. Set depth.
  4716. Larger depth values will denoise lower frequency components more, but
  4717. slow down filtering.
  4718. Must be an int in the range 8-16, default is @code{8}.
  4719. @item luma_strength, ls
  4720. Set luma strength.
  4721. Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is @code{1.0}.
  4722. @item chroma_strength, cs
  4723. Set chroma strength.
  4724. Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is @code{1.0}.
  4725. @end table
  4726. @section pad
  4727. Add paddings to the input image, and place the original input at the
  4728. given coordinates @var{x}, @var{y}.
  4729. This filter accepts the following parameters:
  4730. @table @option
  4731. @item width, w
  4732. @item height, h
  4733. Specify an expression for the size of the output image with the
  4734. paddings added. If the value for @var{width} or @var{height} is 0, the
  4735. corresponding input size is used for the output.
  4736. The @var{width} expression can reference the value set by the
  4737. @var{height} expression, and vice versa.
  4738. The default value of @var{width} and @var{height} is 0.
  4739. @item x
  4740. @item y
  4741. Specify an expression for the offsets where to place the input image
  4742. in the padded area with respect to the top/left border of the output
  4743. image.
  4744. The @var{x} expression can reference the value set by the @var{y}
  4745. expression, and vice versa.
  4746. The default value of @var{x} and @var{y} is 0.
  4747. @item color
  4748. Specify the color of the padded area. For the syntax of this option,
  4749. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  4750. The default value of @var{color} is "black".
  4751. @end table
  4752. The value for the @var{width}, @var{height}, @var{x}, and @var{y}
  4753. options are expressions containing the following constants:
  4754. @table @option
  4755. @item in_w
  4756. @item in_h
  4757. the input video width and height
  4758. @item iw
  4759. @item ih
  4760. same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}
  4761. @item out_w
  4762. @item out_h
  4763. the output width and height, that is the size of the padded area as
  4764. specified by the @var{width} and @var{height} expressions
  4765. @item ow
  4766. @item oh
  4767. same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}
  4768. @item x
  4769. @item y
  4770. x and y offsets as specified by the @var{x} and @var{y}
  4771. expressions, or NAN if not yet specified
  4772. @item a
  4773. same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  4774. @item sar
  4775. input sample aspect ratio
  4776. @item dar
  4777. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{iw} / @var{ih}) * @var{sar}
  4778. @item hsub
  4779. @item vsub
  4780. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  4781. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  4782. @end table
  4783. @subsection Examples
  4784. @itemize
  4785. @item
  4786. Add paddings with color "violet" to the input video. Output video
  4787. size is 640x480, the top-left corner of the input video is placed at
  4788. column 0, row 40:
  4789. @example
  4790. pad=640:480:0:40:violet
  4791. @end example
  4792. The example above is equivalent to the following command:
  4793. @example
  4794. pad=width=640:height=480:x=0:y=40:color=violet
  4795. @end example
  4796. @item
  4797. Pad the input to get an output with dimensions increased by 3/2,
  4798. and put the input video at the center of the padded area:
  4799. @example
  4800. pad="3/2*iw:3/2*ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  4801. @end example
  4802. @item
  4803. Pad the input to get a squared output with size equal to the maximum
  4804. value between the input width and height, and put the input video at
  4805. the center of the padded area:
  4806. @example
  4807. pad="max(iw\,ih):ow:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  4808. @end example
  4809. @item
  4810. Pad the input to get a final w/h ratio of 16:9:
  4811. @example
  4812. pad="ih*16/9:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  4813. @end example
  4814. @item
  4815. In case of anamorphic video, in order to set the output display aspect
  4816. correctly, it is necessary to use @var{sar} in the expression,
  4817. according to the relation:
  4818. @example
  4819. (ih * X / ih) * sar = output_dar
  4820. X = output_dar / sar
  4821. @end example
  4822. Thus the previous example needs to be modified to:
  4823. @example
  4824. pad="ih*16/9/sar:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  4825. @end example
  4826. @item
  4827. Double output size and put the input video in the bottom-right
  4828. corner of the output padded area:
  4829. @example
  4830. pad="2*iw:2*ih:ow-iw:oh-ih"
  4831. @end example
  4832. @end itemize
  4833. @section perspective
  4834. Correct perspective of video not recorded perpendicular to the screen.
  4835. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  4836. @table @option
  4837. @item x0
  4838. @item y0
  4839. @item x1
  4840. @item y1
  4841. @item x2
  4842. @item y2
  4843. @item x3
  4844. @item y3
  4845. Set coordinates expression for top left, top right, bottom left and bottom right corners.
  4846. Default values are @code{0:0:W:0:0:H:W:H} with which perspective will remain unchanged.
  4847. The expressions can use the following variables:
  4848. @table @option
  4849. @item W
  4850. @item H
  4851. the width and height of video frame.
  4852. @end table
  4853. @item interpolation
  4854. Set interpolation for perspective correction.
  4855. It accepts the following values:
  4856. @table @samp
  4857. @item linear
  4858. @item cubic
  4859. @end table
  4860. Default value is @samp{linear}.
  4861. @end table
  4862. @section phase
  4863. Delay interlaced video by one field time so that the field order changes.
  4864. The intended use is to fix PAL movies that have been captured with the
  4865. opposite field order to the film-to-video transfer.
  4866. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  4867. @table @option
  4868. @item mode
  4869. Set phase mode.
  4870. It accepts the following values:
  4871. @table @samp
  4872. @item t
  4873. Capture field order top-first, transfer bottom-first.
  4874. Filter will delay the bottom field.
  4875. @item b
  4876. Capture field order bottom-first, transfer top-first.
  4877. Filter will delay the top field.
  4878. @item p
  4879. Capture and transfer with the same field order. This mode only exists
  4880. for the documentation of the other options to refer to, but if you
  4881. actually select it, the filter will faithfully do nothing.
  4882. @item a
  4883. Capture field order determined automatically by field flags, transfer
  4884. opposite.
  4885. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{b} modes on a frame by frame
  4886. basis using field flags. If no field information is available,
  4887. then this works just like @samp{u}.
  4888. @item u
  4889. Capture unknown or varying, transfer opposite.
  4890. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{b} on a frame by frame basis by
  4891. analyzing the images and selecting the alternative that produces best
  4892. match between the fields.
  4893. @item T
  4894. Capture top-first, transfer unknown or varying.
  4895. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{p} using image analysis.
  4896. @item B
  4897. Capture bottom-first, transfer unknown or varying.
  4898. Filter selects among @samp{b} and @samp{p} using image analysis.
  4899. @item A
  4900. Capture determined by field flags, transfer unknown or varying.
  4901. Filter selects among @samp{t}, @samp{b} and @samp{p} using field flags and
  4902. image analysis. If no field information is available, then this works just
  4903. like @samp{U}. This is the default mode.
  4904. @item U
  4905. Both capture and transfer unknown or varying.
  4906. Filter selects among @samp{t}, @samp{b} and @samp{p} using image analysis only.
  4907. @end table
  4908. @end table
  4909. @section pixdesctest
  4910. Pixel format descriptor test filter, mainly useful for internal
  4911. testing. The output video should be equal to the input video.
  4912. For example:
  4913. @example
  4914. format=monow, pixdesctest
  4915. @end example
  4916. can be used to test the monowhite pixel format descriptor definition.
  4917. @section pp
  4918. Enable the specified chain of postprocessing subfilters using libpostproc. This
  4919. library should be automatically selected with a GPL build (@code{--enable-gpl}).
  4920. Subfilters must be separated by '/' and can be disabled by prepending a '-'.
  4921. Each subfilter and some options have a short and a long name that can be used
  4922. interchangeably, i.e. dr/dering are the same.
  4923. The filters accept the following options:
  4924. @table @option
  4925. @item subfilters
  4926. Set postprocessing subfilters string.
  4927. @end table
  4928. All subfilters share common options to determine their scope:
  4929. @table @option
  4930. @item a/autoq
  4931. Honor the quality commands for this subfilter.
  4932. @item c/chrom
  4933. Do chrominance filtering, too (default).
  4934. @item y/nochrom
  4935. Do luminance filtering only (no chrominance).
  4936. @item n/noluma
  4937. Do chrominance filtering only (no luminance).
  4938. @end table
  4939. These options can be appended after the subfilter name, separated by a '|'.
  4940. Available subfilters are:
  4941. @table @option
  4942. @item hb/hdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  4943. Horizontal deblocking filter
  4944. @table @option
  4945. @item difference
  4946. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  4947. @item flatness
  4948. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  4949. @end table
  4950. @item vb/vdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  4951. Vertical deblocking filter
  4952. @table @option
  4953. @item difference
  4954. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  4955. @item flatness
  4956. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  4957. @end table
  4958. @item ha/hadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  4959. Accurate horizontal deblocking filter
  4960. @table @option
  4961. @item difference
  4962. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  4963. @item flatness
  4964. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  4965. @end table
  4966. @item va/vadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  4967. Accurate vertical deblocking filter
  4968. @table @option
  4969. @item difference
  4970. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  4971. @item flatness
  4972. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  4973. @end table
  4974. @end table
  4975. The horizontal and vertical deblocking filters share the difference and
  4976. flatness values so you cannot set different horizontal and vertical
  4977. thresholds.
  4978. @table @option
  4979. @item h1/x1hdeblock
  4980. Experimental horizontal deblocking filter
  4981. @item v1/x1vdeblock
  4982. Experimental vertical deblocking filter
  4983. @item dr/dering
  4984. Deringing filter
  4985. @item tn/tmpnoise[|threshold1[|threshold2[|threshold3]]], temporal noise reducer
  4986. @table @option
  4987. @item threshold1
  4988. larger -> stronger filtering
  4989. @item threshold2
  4990. larger -> stronger filtering
  4991. @item threshold3
  4992. larger -> stronger filtering
  4993. @end table
  4994. @item al/autolevels[:f/fullyrange], automatic brightness / contrast correction
  4995. @table @option
  4996. @item f/fullyrange
  4997. Stretch luminance to @code{0-255}.
  4998. @end table
  4999. @item lb/linblenddeint
  5000. Linear blend deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
  5001. filtering all lines with a @code{(1 2 1)} filter.
  5002. @item li/linipoldeint
  5003. Linear interpolating deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
  5004. linearly interpolating every second line.
  5005. @item ci/cubicipoldeint
  5006. Cubic interpolating deinterlacing filter deinterlaces the given block by
  5007. cubically interpolating every second line.
  5008. @item md/mediandeint
  5009. Median deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by applying a
  5010. median filter to every second line.
  5011. @item fd/ffmpegdeint
  5012. FFmpeg deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by filtering every
  5013. second line with a @code{(-1 4 2 4 -1)} filter.
  5014. @item l5/lowpass5
  5015. Vertically applied FIR lowpass deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given
  5016. block by filtering all lines with a @code{(-1 2 6 2 -1)} filter.
  5017. @item fq/forceQuant[|quantizer]
  5018. Overrides the quantizer table from the input with the constant quantizer you
  5019. specify.
  5020. @table @option
  5021. @item quantizer
  5022. Quantizer to use
  5023. @end table
  5024. @item de/default
  5025. Default pp filter combination (@code{hb|a,vb|a,dr|a})
  5026. @item fa/fast
  5027. Fast pp filter combination (@code{h1|a,v1|a,dr|a})
  5028. @item ac
  5029. High quality pp filter combination (@code{ha|a|128|7,va|a,dr|a})
  5030. @end table
  5031. @subsection Examples
  5032. @itemize
  5033. @item
  5034. Apply horizontal and vertical deblocking, deringing and automatic
  5035. brightness/contrast:
  5036. @example
  5037. pp=hb/vb/dr/al
  5038. @end example
  5039. @item
  5040. Apply default filters without brightness/contrast correction:
  5041. @example
  5042. pp=de/-al
  5043. @end example
  5044. @item
  5045. Apply default filters and temporal denoiser:
  5046. @example
  5047. pp=default/tmpnoise|1|2|3
  5048. @end example
  5049. @item
  5050. Apply deblocking on luminance only, and switch vertical deblocking on or off
  5051. automatically depending on available CPU time:
  5052. @example
  5053. pp=hb|y/vb|a
  5054. @end example
  5055. @end itemize
  5056. @section psnr
  5057. Obtain the average, maximum and minimum PSNR (Peak Signal to Noise
  5058. Ratio) between two input videos.
  5059. This filter takes in input two input videos, the first input is
  5060. considered the "main" source and is passed unchanged to the
  5061. output. The second input is used as a "reference" video for computing
  5062. the PSNR.
  5063. Both video inputs must have the same resolution and pixel format for
  5064. this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
  5065. have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.
  5066. The obtained average PSNR is printed through the logging system.
  5067. The filter stores the accumulated MSE (mean squared error) of each
  5068. frame, and at the end of the processing it is averaged across all frames
  5069. equally, and the following formula is applied to obtain the PSNR:
  5070. @example
  5071. PSNR = 10*log10(MAX^2/MSE)
  5072. @end example
  5073. Where MAX is the average of the maximum values of each component of the
  5074. image.
  5075. The description of the accepted parameters follows.
  5076. @table @option
  5077. @item stats_file, f
  5078. If specified the filter will use the named file to save the PSNR of
  5079. each individual frame.
  5080. @end table
  5081. The file printed if @var{stats_file} is selected, contains a sequence of
  5082. key/value pairs of the form @var{key}:@var{value} for each compared
  5083. couple of frames.
  5084. A description of each shown parameter follows:
  5085. @table @option
  5086. @item n
  5087. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 1
  5088. @item mse_avg
  5089. Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
  5090. frames, averaged over all the image components.
  5091. @item mse_y, mse_u, mse_v, mse_r, mse_g, mse_g, mse_a
  5092. Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
  5093. frames for the component specified by the suffix.
  5094. @item psnr_y, psnr_u, psnr_v, psnr_r, psnr_g, psnr_b, psnr_a
  5095. Peak Signal to Noise ratio of the compared frames for the component
  5096. specified by the suffix.
  5097. @end table
  5098. For example:
  5099. @example
  5100. movie=ref_movie.mpg, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  5101. [main][ref] psnr="stats_file=stats.log" [out]
  5102. @end example
  5103. On this example the input file being processed is compared with the
  5104. reference file @file{ref_movie.mpg}. The PSNR of each individual frame
  5105. is stored in @file{stats.log}.
  5106. @anchor{pullup}
  5107. @section pullup
  5108. Pulldown reversal (inverse telecine) filter, capable of handling mixed
  5109. hard-telecine, 24000/1001 fps progressive, and 30000/1001 fps progressive
  5110. content.
  5111. The pullup filter is designed to take advantage of future context in making
  5112. its decisions. This filter is stateless in the sense that it does not lock
  5113. onto a pattern to follow, but it instead looks forward to the following
  5114. fields in order to identify matches and rebuild progressive frames.
  5115. To produce content with an even framerate, insert the fps filter after
  5116. pullup, use @code{fps=24000/1001} if the input frame rate is 29.97fps,
  5117. @code{fps=24} for 30fps and the (rare) telecined 25fps input.
  5118. The filter accepts the following options:
  5119. @table @option
  5120. @item jl
  5121. @item jr
  5122. @item jt
  5123. @item jb
  5124. These options set the amount of "junk" to ignore at the left, right, top, and
  5125. bottom of the image, respectively. Left and right are in units of 8 pixels,
  5126. while top and bottom are in units of 2 lines.
  5127. The default is 8 pixels on each side.
  5128. @item sb
  5129. Set the strict breaks. Setting this option to 1 will reduce the chances of
  5130. filter generating an occasional mismatched frame, but it may also cause an
  5131. excessive number of frames to be dropped during high motion sequences.
  5132. Conversely, setting it to -1 will make filter match fields more easily.
  5133. This may help processing of video where there is slight blurring between
  5134. the fields, but may also cause there to be interlaced frames in the output.
  5135. Default value is @code{0}.
  5136. @item mp
  5137. Set the metric plane to use. It accepts the following values:
  5138. @table @samp
  5139. @item l
  5140. Use luma plane.
  5141. @item u
  5142. Use chroma blue plane.
  5143. @item v
  5144. Use chroma red plane.
  5145. @end table
  5146. This option may be set to use chroma plane instead of the default luma plane
  5147. for doing filter's computations. This may improve accuracy on very clean
  5148. source material, but more likely will decrease accuracy, especially if there
  5149. is chroma noise (rainbow effect) or any grayscale video.
  5150. The main purpose of setting @option{mp} to a chroma plane is to reduce CPU
  5151. load and make pullup usable in realtime on slow machines.
  5152. @end table
  5153. For best results (without duplicated frames in the output file) it is
  5154. necessary to change the output frame rate. For example, to inverse
  5155. telecine NTSC input:
  5156. @example
  5157. ffmpeg -i input -vf pullup -r 24000/1001 ...
  5158. @end example
  5159. @section removelogo
  5160. Suppress a TV station logo, using an image file to determine which
  5161. pixels comprise the logo. It works by filling in the pixels that
  5162. comprise the logo with neighboring pixels.
  5163. The filter accepts the following options:
  5164. @table @option
  5165. @item filename, f
  5166. Set the filter bitmap file, which can be any image format supported by
  5167. libavformat. The width and height of the image file must match those of the
  5168. video stream being processed.
  5169. @end table
  5170. Pixels in the provided bitmap image with a value of zero are not
  5171. considered part of the logo, non-zero pixels are considered part of
  5172. the logo. If you use white (255) for the logo and black (0) for the
  5173. rest, you will be safe. For making the filter bitmap, it is
  5174. recommended to take a screen capture of a black frame with the logo
  5175. visible, and then using a threshold filter followed by the erode
  5176. filter once or twice.
  5177. If needed, little splotches can be fixed manually. Remember that if
  5178. logo pixels are not covered, the filter quality will be much
  5179. reduced. Marking too many pixels as part of the logo does not hurt as
  5180. much, but it will increase the amount of blurring needed to cover over
  5181. the image and will destroy more information than necessary, and extra
  5182. pixels will slow things down on a large logo.
  5183. @section rotate
  5184. Rotate video by an arbitrary angle expressed in radians.
  5185. The filter accepts the following options:
  5186. A description of the optional parameters follows.
  5187. @table @option
  5188. @item angle, a
  5189. Set an expression for the angle by which to rotate the input video
  5190. clockwise, expressed as a number of radians. A negative value will
  5191. result in a counter-clockwise rotation. By default it is set to "0".
  5192. This expression is evaluated for each frame.
  5193. @item out_w, ow
  5194. Set the output width expression, default value is "iw".
  5195. This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
  5196. @item out_h, oh
  5197. Set the output height expression, default value is "ih".
  5198. This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
  5199. @item bilinear
  5200. Enable bilinear interpolation if set to 1, a value of 0 disables
  5201. it. Default value is 1.
  5202. @item fillcolor, c
  5203. Set the color used to fill the output area not covered by the rotated
  5204. image. For the generalsyntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
  5205. ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special value "none" is selected then no
  5206. background is printed (useful for example if the background is never shown).
  5207. Default value is "black".
  5208. @end table
  5209. The expressions for the angle and the output size can contain the
  5210. following constants and functions:
  5211. @table @option
  5212. @item n
  5213. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0. It is always NAN
  5214. before the first frame is filtered.
  5215. @item t
  5216. time in seconds of the input frame, it is set to 0 when the filter is
  5217. configured. It is always NAN before the first frame is filtered.
  5218. @item hsub
  5219. @item vsub
  5220. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5221. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5222. @item in_w, iw
  5223. @item in_h, ih
  5224. the input video width and height
  5225. @item out_w, ow
  5226. @item out_h, oh
  5227. the output width and height, that is the size of the padded area as
  5228. specified by the @var{width} and @var{height} expressions
  5229. @item rotw(a)
  5230. @item roth(a)
  5231. the minimal width/height required for completely containing the input
  5232. video rotated by @var{a} radians.
  5233. These are only available when computing the @option{out_w} and
  5234. @option{out_h} expressions.
  5235. @end table
  5236. @subsection Examples
  5237. @itemize
  5238. @item
  5239. Rotate the input by PI/6 radians clockwise:
  5240. @example
  5241. rotate=PI/6
  5242. @end example
  5243. @item
  5244. Rotate the input by PI/6 radians counter-clockwise:
  5245. @example
  5246. rotate=-PI/6
  5247. @end example
  5248. @item
  5249. Rotate the input by 45 degrees clockwise:
  5250. @example
  5251. rotate=45*PI/180
  5252. @end example
  5253. @item
  5254. Apply a constant rotation with period T, starting from an angle of PI/3:
  5255. @example
  5256. rotate=PI/3+2*PI*t/T
  5257. @end example
  5258. @item
  5259. Make the input video rotation oscillating with a period of T
  5260. seconds and an amplitude of A radians:
  5261. @example
  5262. rotate=A*sin(2*PI/T*t)
  5263. @end example
  5264. @item
  5265. Rotate the video, output size is choosen so that the whole rotating
  5266. input video is always completely contained in the output:
  5267. @example
  5268. rotate='2*PI*t:ow=hypot(iw,ih):oh=ow'
  5269. @end example
  5270. @item
  5271. Rotate the video, reduce the output size so that no background is ever
  5272. shown:
  5273. @example
  5274. rotate=2*PI*t:ow='min(iw,ih)/sqrt(2)':oh=ow:c=none
  5275. @end example
  5276. @end itemize
  5277. @subsection Commands
  5278. The filter supports the following commands:
  5279. @table @option
  5280. @item a, angle
  5281. Set the angle expression.
  5282. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  5283. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  5284. value.
  5285. @end table
  5286. @section sab
  5287. Apply Shape Adaptive Blur.
  5288. The filter accepts the following options:
  5289. @table @option
  5290. @item luma_radius, lr
  5291. Set luma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0, default
  5292. value is 1.0. A greater value will result in a more blurred image, and
  5293. in slower processing.
  5294. @item luma_pre_filter_radius, lpfr
  5295. Set luma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range, default
  5296. value is 1.0.
  5297. @item luma_strength, ls
  5298. Set luma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered, must
  5299. be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range, default value is 1.0.
  5300. @item chroma_radius, cr
  5301. Set chroma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0. A
  5302. greater value will result in a more blurred image, and in slower
  5303. processing.
  5304. @item chroma_pre_filter_radius, cpfr
  5305. Set chroma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range.
  5306. @item chroma_strength, cs
  5307. Set chroma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered,
  5308. must be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range.
  5309. @end table
  5310. Each chroma option value, if not explicitly specified, is set to the
  5311. corresponding luma option value.
  5312. @anchor{scale}
  5313. @section scale
  5314. Scale (resize) the input video, using the libswscale library.
  5315. The scale filter forces the output display aspect ratio to be the same
  5316. of the input, by changing the output sample aspect ratio.
  5317. If the input image format is different from the format requested by
  5318. the next filter, the scale filter will convert the input to the
  5319. requested format.
  5320. @subsection Options
  5321. The filter accepts the following options, or any of the options
  5322. supported by the libswscale scaler.
  5323. See @ref{scaler_options,,the ffmpeg-scaler manual,ffmpeg-scaler} for
  5324. the complete list of scaler options.
  5325. @table @option
  5326. @item width, w
  5327. @item height, h
  5328. Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input
  5329. dimension.
  5330. If the value is 0, the input width is used for the output.
  5331. If one of the values is -1, the scale filter will use a value that
  5332. maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the
  5333. other specified dimension. If both of them are -1, the input size is
  5334. used
  5335. If one of the values is -n with n > 1, the scale filter will also use a value
  5336. that maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the other
  5337. specified dimension. After that it will, however, make sure that the calculated
  5338. dimension is divisible by n and adjust the value if necessary.
  5339. See below for the list of accepted constants for use in the dimension
  5340. expression.
  5341. @item interl
  5342. Set the interlacing mode. It accepts the following values:
  5343. @table @samp
  5344. @item 1
  5345. Force interlaced aware scaling.
  5346. @item 0
  5347. Do not apply interlaced scaling.
  5348. @item -1
  5349. Select interlaced aware scaling depending on whether the source frames
  5350. are flagged as interlaced or not.
  5351. @end table
  5352. Default value is @samp{0}.
  5353. @item flags
  5354. Set libswscale scaling flags. See
  5355. @ref{sws_flags,,the ffmpeg-scaler manual,ffmpeg-scaler} for the
  5356. complete list of values. If not explictly specified the filter applies
  5357. the default flags.
  5358. @item size, s
  5359. Set the video size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
  5360. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  5361. @item in_color_matrix
  5362. @item out_color_matrix
  5363. Set in/output YCbCr color space type.
  5364. This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
  5365. a specific value used for the output and encoder.
  5366. If not specified, the color space type depends on the pixel format.
  5367. Possible values:
  5368. @table @samp
  5369. @item auto
  5370. Choose automatically.
  5371. @item bt709
  5372. Format conforming to International Telecommunication Union (ITU)
  5373. Recommendation BT.709.
  5374. @item fcc
  5375. Set color space conforming to the United States Federal Communications
  5376. Commission (FCC) Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 (2003) 73.682 (a).
  5377. @item bt601
  5378. Set color space conforming to:
  5379. @itemize
  5380. @item
  5381. ITU Radiocommunication Sector (ITU-R) Recommendation BT.601
  5382. @item
  5383. ITU-R Rec. BT.470-6 (1998) Systems B, B1, and G
  5384. @item
  5385. Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) ST 170:2004
  5386. @end itemize
  5387. @item smpte240m
  5388. Set color space conforming to SMPTE ST 240:1999.
  5389. @end table
  5390. @item in_range
  5391. @item out_range
  5392. Set in/output YCbCr sample range.
  5393. This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
  5394. a specific value used for the output and encoder. If not specified, the
  5395. range depends on the pixel format. Possible values:
  5396. @table @samp
  5397. @item auto
  5398. Choose automatically.
  5399. @item jpeg/full/pc
  5400. Set full range (0-255 in case of 8-bit luma).
  5401. @item mpeg/tv
  5402. Set "MPEG" range (16-235 in case of 8-bit luma).
  5403. @end table
  5404. @item force_original_aspect_ratio
  5405. Enable decreasing or increasing output video width or height if necessary to
  5406. keep the original aspect ratio. Possible values:
  5407. @table @samp
  5408. @item disable
  5409. Scale the video as specified and disable this feature.
  5410. @item decrease
  5411. The output video dimensions will automatically be decreased if needed.
  5412. @item increase
  5413. The output video dimensions will automatically be increased if needed.
  5414. @end table
  5415. One useful instance of this option is that when you know a specific device's
  5416. maximum allowed resolution, you can use this to limit the output video to
  5417. that, while retaining the aspect ratio. For example, device A allows
  5418. 1280x720 playback, and your video is 1920x800. Using this option (set it to
  5419. decrease) and specifying 1280x720 to the command line makes the output
  5420. 1280x533.
  5421. Please note that this is a different thing than specifying -1 for @option{w}
  5422. or @option{h}, you still need to specify the output resolution for this option
  5423. to work.
  5424. @end table
  5425. The values of the @option{w} and @option{h} options are expressions
  5426. containing the following constants:
  5427. @table @var
  5428. @item in_w
  5429. @item in_h
  5430. the input width and height
  5431. @item iw
  5432. @item ih
  5433. same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}
  5434. @item out_w
  5435. @item out_h
  5436. the output (scaled) width and height
  5437. @item ow
  5438. @item oh
  5439. same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}
  5440. @item a
  5441. same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  5442. @item sar
  5443. input sample aspect ratio
  5444. @item dar
  5445. input display aspect ratio. Calculated from @code{(iw / ih) * sar}.
  5446. @item hsub
  5447. @item vsub
  5448. horizontal and vertical input chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5449. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5450. @item ohsub
  5451. @item ovsub
  5452. horizontal and vertical output chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5453. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5454. @end table
  5455. @subsection Examples
  5456. @itemize
  5457. @item
  5458. Scale the input video to a size of 200x100:
  5459. @example
  5460. scale=w=200:h=100
  5461. @end example
  5462. This is equivalent to:
  5463. @example
  5464. scale=200:100
  5465. @end example
  5466. or:
  5467. @example
  5468. scale=200x100
  5469. @end example
  5470. @item
  5471. Specify a size abbreviation for the output size:
  5472. @example
  5473. scale=qcif
  5474. @end example
  5475. which can also be written as:
  5476. @example
  5477. scale=size=qcif
  5478. @end example
  5479. @item
  5480. Scale the input to 2x:
  5481. @example
  5482. scale=w=2*iw:h=2*ih
  5483. @end example
  5484. @item
  5485. The above is the same as:
  5486. @example
  5487. scale=2*in_w:2*in_h
  5488. @end example
  5489. @item
  5490. Scale the input to 2x with forced interlaced scaling:
  5491. @example
  5492. scale=2*iw:2*ih:interl=1
  5493. @end example
  5494. @item
  5495. Scale the input to half size:
  5496. @example
  5497. scale=w=iw/2:h=ih/2
  5498. @end example
  5499. @item
  5500. Increase the width, and set the height to the same size:
  5501. @example
  5502. scale=3/2*iw:ow
  5503. @end example
  5504. @item
  5505. Seek for Greek harmony:
  5506. @example
  5507. scale=iw:1/PHI*iw
  5508. scale=ih*PHI:ih
  5509. @end example
  5510. @item
  5511. Increase the height, and set the width to 3/2 of the height:
  5512. @example
  5513. scale=w=3/2*oh:h=3/5*ih
  5514. @end example
  5515. @item
  5516. Increase the size, but make the size a multiple of the chroma
  5517. subsample values:
  5518. @example
  5519. scale="trunc(3/2*iw/hsub)*hsub:trunc(3/2*ih/vsub)*vsub"
  5520. @end example
  5521. @item
  5522. Increase the width to a maximum of 500 pixels, keep the same input
  5523. aspect ratio:
  5524. @example
  5525. scale=w='min(500\, iw*3/2):h=-1'
  5526. @end example
  5527. @end itemize
  5528. @section separatefields
  5529. The @code{separatefields} takes a frame-based video input and splits
  5530. each frame into its components fields, producing a new half height clip
  5531. with twice the frame rate and twice the frame count.
  5532. This filter use field-dominance information in frame to decide which
  5533. of each pair of fields to place first in the output.
  5534. If it gets it wrong use @ref{setfield} filter before @code{separatefields} filter.
  5535. @section setdar, setsar
  5536. The @code{setdar} filter sets the Display Aspect Ratio for the filter
  5537. output video.
  5538. This is done by changing the specified Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect
  5539. Ratio, according to the following equation:
  5540. @example
  5541. @var{DAR} = @var{HORIZONTAL_RESOLUTION} / @var{VERTICAL_RESOLUTION} * @var{SAR}
  5542. @end example
  5543. Keep in mind that the @code{setdar} filter does not modify the pixel
  5544. dimensions of the video frame. Also the display aspect ratio set by
  5545. this filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain,
  5546. e.g. in case of scaling or if another "setdar" or a "setsar" filter is
  5547. applied.
  5548. The @code{setsar} filter sets the Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect Ratio for
  5549. the filter output video.
  5550. Note that as a consequence of the application of this filter, the
  5551. output display aspect ratio will change according to the equation
  5552. above.
  5553. Keep in mind that the sample aspect ratio set by the @code{setsar}
  5554. filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain, e.g. if
  5555. another "setsar" or a "setdar" filter is applied.
  5556. The filters accept the following options:
  5557. @table @option
  5558. @item r, ratio, dar (@code{setdar} only), sar (@code{setsar} only)
  5559. Set the aspect ratio used by the filter.
  5560. The parameter can be a floating point number string, an expression, or
  5561. a string of the form @var{num}:@var{den}, where @var{num} and
  5562. @var{den} are the numerator and denominator of the aspect ratio. If
  5563. the parameter is not specified, it is assumed the value "0".
  5564. In case the form "@var{num}:@var{den}" is used, the @code{:} character
  5565. should be escaped.
  5566. @item max
  5567. Set the maximum integer value to use for expressing numerator and
  5568. denominator when reducing the expressed aspect ratio to a rational.
  5569. Default value is @code{100}.
  5570. @end table
  5571. The parameter @var{sar} is an expression containing
  5572. the following constants:
  5573. @table @option
  5574. @item E, PI, PHI
  5575. the corresponding mathematical approximated values for e
  5576. (euler number), pi (greek PI), phi (golden ratio)
  5577. @item w, h
  5578. the input width and height
  5579. @item a
  5580. same as @var{w} / @var{h}
  5581. @item sar
  5582. input sample aspect ratio
  5583. @item dar
  5584. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}
  5585. @item hsub, vsub
  5586. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5587. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5588. @end table
  5589. @subsection Examples
  5590. @itemize
  5591. @item
  5592. To change the display aspect ratio to 16:9, specify one of the following:
  5593. @example
  5594. setdar=dar=1.77777
  5595. setdar=dar=16/9
  5596. setdar=dar=1.77777
  5597. @end example
  5598. @item
  5599. To change the sample aspect ratio to 10:11, specify:
  5600. @example
  5601. setsar=sar=10/11
  5602. @end example
  5603. @item
  5604. To set a display aspect ratio of 16:9, and specify a maximum integer value of
  5605. 1000 in the aspect ratio reduction, use the command:
  5606. @example
  5607. setdar=ratio=16/9:max=1000
  5608. @end example
  5609. @end itemize
  5610. @anchor{setfield}
  5611. @section setfield
  5612. Force field for the output video frame.
  5613. The @code{setfield} filter marks the interlace type field for the
  5614. output frames. It does not change the input frame, but only sets the
  5615. corresponding property, which affects how the frame is treated by
  5616. following filters (e.g. @code{fieldorder} or @code{yadif}).
  5617. The filter accepts the following options:
  5618. @table @option
  5619. @item mode
  5620. Available values are:
  5621. @table @samp
  5622. @item auto
  5623. Keep the same field property.
  5624. @item bff
  5625. Mark the frame as bottom-field-first.
  5626. @item tff
  5627. Mark the frame as top-field-first.
  5628. @item prog
  5629. Mark the frame as progressive.
  5630. @end table
  5631. @end table
  5632. @section showinfo
  5633. Show a line containing various information for each input video frame.
  5634. The input video is not modified.
  5635. The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
  5636. @var{key}:@var{value}.
  5637. A description of each shown parameter follows:
  5638. @table @option
  5639. @item n
  5640. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0
  5641. @item pts
  5642. Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
  5643. time base units. The time base unit depends on the filter input pad.
  5644. @item pts_time
  5645. Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
  5646. seconds
  5647. @item pos
  5648. position of the frame in the input stream, -1 if this information in
  5649. unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic video)
  5650. @item fmt
  5651. pixel format name
  5652. @item sar
  5653. sample aspect ratio of the input frame, expressed in the form
  5654. @var{num}/@var{den}
  5655. @item s
  5656. size of the input frame. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
  5657. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  5658. @item i
  5659. interlaced mode ("P" for "progressive", "T" for top field first, "B"
  5660. for bottom field first)
  5661. @item iskey
  5662. 1 if the frame is a key frame, 0 otherwise
  5663. @item type
  5664. picture type of the input frame ("I" for an I-frame, "P" for a
  5665. P-frame, "B" for a B-frame, "?" for unknown type).
  5666. Check also the documentation of the @code{AVPictureType} enum and of
  5667. the @code{av_get_picture_type_char} function defined in
  5668. @file{libavutil/avutil.h}.
  5669. @item checksum
  5670. Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of all the planes of the input frame
  5671. @item plane_checksum
  5672. Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of each plane of the input frame,
  5673. expressed in the form "[@var{c0} @var{c1} @var{c2} @var{c3}]"
  5674. @end table
  5675. @anchor{smartblur}
  5676. @section smartblur
  5677. Blur the input video without impacting the outlines.
  5678. The filter accepts the following options:
  5679. @table @option
  5680. @item luma_radius, lr
  5681. Set the luma radius. The option value must be a float number in
  5682. the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
  5683. used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
  5684. @item luma_strength, ls
  5685. Set the luma strength. The option value must be a float number
  5686. in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
  5687. in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
  5688. [-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
  5689. @item luma_threshold, lt
  5690. Set the luma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
  5691. whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
  5692. integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
  5693. a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
  5694. in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
  5695. @item chroma_radius, cr
  5696. Set the chroma radius. The option value must be a float number in
  5697. the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
  5698. used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
  5699. @item chroma_strength, cs
  5700. Set the chroma strength. The option value must be a float number
  5701. in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
  5702. in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
  5703. [-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
  5704. @item chroma_threshold, ct
  5705. Set the chroma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
  5706. whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
  5707. integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
  5708. a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
  5709. in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
  5710. @end table
  5711. If a chroma option is not explicitly set, the corresponding luma value
  5712. is set.
  5713. @section stereo3d
  5714. Convert between different stereoscopic image formats.
  5715. The filters accept the following options:
  5716. @table @option
  5717. @item in
  5718. Set stereoscopic image format of input.
  5719. Available values for input image formats are:
  5720. @table @samp
  5721. @item sbsl
  5722. side by side parallel (left eye left, right eye right)
  5723. @item sbsr
  5724. side by side crosseye (right eye left, left eye right)
  5725. @item sbs2l
  5726. side by side parallel with half width resolution
  5727. (left eye left, right eye right)
  5728. @item sbs2r
  5729. side by side crosseye with half width resolution
  5730. (right eye left, left eye right)
  5731. @item abl
  5732. above-below (left eye above, right eye below)
  5733. @item abr
  5734. above-below (right eye above, left eye below)
  5735. @item ab2l
  5736. above-below with half height resolution
  5737. (left eye above, right eye below)
  5738. @item ab2r
  5739. above-below with half height resolution
  5740. (right eye above, left eye below)
  5741. @item al
  5742. alternating frames (left eye first, right eye second)
  5743. @item ar
  5744. alternating frames (right eye first, left eye second)
  5745. Default value is @samp{sbsl}.
  5746. @end table
  5747. @item out
  5748. Set stereoscopic image format of output.
  5749. Available values for output image formats are all the input formats as well as:
  5750. @table @samp
  5751. @item arbg
  5752. anaglyph red/blue gray
  5753. (red filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  5754. @item argg
  5755. anaglyph red/green gray
  5756. (red filter on left eye, green filter on right eye)
  5757. @item arcg
  5758. anaglyph red/cyan gray
  5759. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  5760. @item arch
  5761. anaglyph red/cyan half colored
  5762. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  5763. @item arcc
  5764. anaglyph red/cyan color
  5765. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  5766. @item arcd
  5767. anaglyph red/cyan color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  5768. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  5769. @item agmg
  5770. anaglyph green/magenta gray
  5771. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  5772. @item agmh
  5773. anaglyph green/magenta half colored
  5774. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  5775. @item agmc
  5776. anaglyph green/magenta colored
  5777. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  5778. @item agmd
  5779. anaglyph green/magenta color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  5780. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  5781. @item aybg
  5782. anaglyph yellow/blue gray
  5783. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  5784. @item aybh
  5785. anaglyph yellow/blue half colored
  5786. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  5787. @item aybc
  5788. anaglyph yellow/blue colored
  5789. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  5790. @item aybd
  5791. anaglyph yellow/blue color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  5792. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  5793. @item irl
  5794. interleaved rows (left eye has top row, right eye starts on next row)
  5795. @item irr
  5796. interleaved rows (right eye has top row, left eye starts on next row)
  5797. @item ml
  5798. mono output (left eye only)
  5799. @item mr
  5800. mono output (right eye only)
  5801. @end table
  5802. Default value is @samp{arcd}.
  5803. @end table
  5804. @subsection Examples
  5805. @itemize
  5806. @item
  5807. Convert input video from side by side parallel to anaglyph yellow/blue dubois:
  5808. @example
  5809. stereo3d=sbsl:aybd
  5810. @end example
  5811. @item
  5812. Convert input video from above bellow (left eye above, right eye below) to side by side crosseye.
  5813. @example
  5814. stereo3d=abl:sbsr
  5815. @end example
  5816. @end itemize
  5817. @section spp
  5818. Apply a simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses the image
  5819. at several (or - in the case of @option{quality} level @code{6} - all) shifts
  5820. and average the results.
  5821. The filter accepts the following options:
  5822. @table @option
  5823. @item quality
  5824. Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
  5825. an integer in the range 0-6. If set to @code{0}, the filter will have no
  5826. effect. A value of @code{6} means the higher quality. For each increment of
  5827. that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
  5828. @code{3}.
  5829. @item qp
  5830. Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
  5831. from the video stream (if available).
  5832. @item mode
  5833. Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:
  5834. @table @samp
  5835. @item hard
  5836. Set hard thresholding (default).
  5837. @item soft
  5838. Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).
  5839. @end table
  5840. @item use_bframe_qp
  5841. Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to @code{1}. Using this
  5842. option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
  5843. @code{0} (not enabled).
  5844. @end table
  5845. @anchor{subtitles}
  5846. @section subtitles
  5847. Draw subtitles on top of input video using the libass library.
  5848. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  5849. @code{--enable-libass}. This filter also requires a build with libavcodec and
  5850. libavformat to convert the passed subtitles file to ASS (Advanced Substation
  5851. Alpha) subtitles format.
  5852. The filter accepts the following options:
  5853. @table @option
  5854. @item filename, f
  5855. Set the filename of the subtitle file to read. It must be specified.
  5856. @item original_size
  5857. Specify the size of the original video, the video for which the ASS file
  5858. was composed. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in
  5859. the ffmpeg-utils manual. Due to a misdesign in ASS aspect ratio arithmetic,
  5860. this is necessary to correctly scale the fonts if the aspect ratio has been
  5861. changed.
  5862. @item charenc
  5863. Set subtitles input character encoding. @code{subtitles} filter only. Only
  5864. useful if not UTF-8.
  5865. @end table
  5866. If the first key is not specified, it is assumed that the first value
  5867. specifies the @option{filename}.
  5868. For example, to render the file @file{sub.srt} on top of the input
  5869. video, use the command:
  5870. @example
  5871. subtitles=sub.srt
  5872. @end example
  5873. which is equivalent to:
  5874. @example
  5875. subtitles=filename=sub.srt
  5876. @end example
  5877. @section super2xsai
  5878. Scale the input by 2x and smooth using the Super2xSaI (Scale and
  5879. Interpolate) pixel art scaling algorithm.
  5880. Useful for enlarging pixel art images without reducing sharpness.
  5881. @section swapuv
  5882. Swap U & V plane.
  5883. @section telecine
  5884. Apply telecine process to the video.
  5885. This filter accepts the following options:
  5886. @table @option
  5887. @item first_field
  5888. @table @samp
  5889. @item top, t
  5890. top field first
  5891. @item bottom, b
  5892. bottom field first
  5893. The default value is @code{top}.
  5894. @end table
  5895. @item pattern
  5896. A string of numbers representing the pulldown pattern you wish to apply.
  5897. The default value is @code{23}.
  5898. @end table
  5899. @example
  5900. Some typical patterns:
  5901. NTSC output (30i):
  5902. 27.5p: 32222
  5903. 24p: 23 (classic)
  5904. 24p: 2332 (preferred)
  5905. 20p: 33
  5906. 18p: 334
  5907. 16p: 3444
  5908. PAL output (25i):
  5909. 27.5p: 12222
  5910. 24p: 222222222223 ("Euro pulldown")
  5911. 16.67p: 33
  5912. 16p: 33333334
  5913. @end example
  5914. @section thumbnail
  5915. Select the most representative frame in a given sequence of consecutive frames.
  5916. The filter accepts the following options:
  5917. @table @option
  5918. @item n
  5919. Set the frames batch size to analyze; in a set of @var{n} frames, the filter
  5920. will pick one of them, and then handle the next batch of @var{n} frames until
  5921. the end. Default is @code{100}.
  5922. @end table
  5923. Since the filter keeps track of the whole frames sequence, a bigger @var{n}
  5924. value will result in a higher memory usage, so a high value is not recommended.
  5925. @subsection Examples
  5926. @itemize
  5927. @item
  5928. Extract one picture each 50 frames:
  5929. @example
  5930. thumbnail=50
  5931. @end example
  5932. @item
  5933. Complete example of a thumbnail creation with @command{ffmpeg}:
  5934. @example
  5935. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf thumbnail,scale=300:200 -frames:v 1 out.png
  5936. @end example
  5937. @end itemize
  5938. @section tile
  5939. Tile several successive frames together.
  5940. The filter accepts the following options:
  5941. @table @option
  5942. @item layout
  5943. Set the grid size (i.e. the number of lines and columns). For the syntax of
  5944. this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  5945. @item nb_frames
  5946. Set the maximum number of frames to render in the given area. It must be less
  5947. than or equal to @var{w}x@var{h}. The default value is @code{0}, meaning all
  5948. the area will be used.
  5949. @item margin
  5950. Set the outer border margin in pixels.
  5951. @item padding
  5952. Set the inner border thickness (i.e. the number of pixels between frames). For
  5953. more advanced padding options (such as having different values for the edges),
  5954. refer to the pad video filter.
  5955. @item color
  5956. Specify the color of the unused areaFor the syntax of this option, check the
  5957. "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value of @var{color}
  5958. is "black".
  5959. @end table
  5960. @subsection Examples
  5961. @itemize
  5962. @item
  5963. Produce 8x8 PNG tiles of all keyframes (@option{-skip_frame nokey}) in a movie:
  5964. @example
  5965. ffmpeg -skip_frame nokey -i file.avi -vf 'scale=128:72,tile=8x8' -an -vsync 0 keyframes%03d.png
  5966. @end example
  5967. The @option{-vsync 0} is necessary to prevent @command{ffmpeg} from
  5968. duplicating each output frame to accomodate the originally detected frame
  5969. rate.
  5970. @item
  5971. Display @code{5} pictures in an area of @code{3x2} frames,
  5972. with @code{7} pixels between them, and @code{2} pixels of initial margin, using
  5973. mixed flat and named options:
  5974. @example
  5975. tile=3x2:nb_frames=5:padding=7:margin=2
  5976. @end example
  5977. @end itemize
  5978. @section tinterlace
  5979. Perform various types of temporal field interlacing.
  5980. Frames are counted starting from 1, so the first input frame is
  5981. considered odd.
  5982. The filter accepts the following options:
  5983. @table @option
  5984. @item mode
  5985. Specify the mode of the interlacing. This option can also be specified
  5986. as a value alone. See below for a list of values for this option.
  5987. Available values are:
  5988. @table @samp
  5989. @item merge, 0
  5990. Move odd frames into the upper field, even into the lower field,
  5991. generating a double height frame at half frame rate.
  5992. @item drop_odd, 1
  5993. Only output even frames, odd frames are dropped, generating a frame with
  5994. unchanged height at half frame rate.
  5995. @item drop_even, 2
  5996. Only output odd frames, even frames are dropped, generating a frame with
  5997. unchanged height at half frame rate.
  5998. @item pad, 3
  5999. Expand each frame to full height, but pad alternate lines with black,
  6000. generating a frame with double height at the same input frame rate.
  6001. @item interleave_top, 4
  6002. Interleave the upper field from odd frames with the lower field from
  6003. even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6004. @item interleave_bottom, 5
  6005. Interleave the lower field from odd frames with the upper field from
  6006. even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6007. @item interlacex2, 6
  6008. Double frame rate with unchanged height. Frames are inserted each
  6009. containing the second temporal field from the previous input frame and
  6010. the first temporal field from the next input frame. This mode relies on
  6011. the top_field_first flag. Useful for interlaced video displays with no
  6012. field synchronisation.
  6013. @end table
  6014. Numeric values are deprecated but are accepted for backward
  6015. compatibility reasons.
  6016. Default mode is @code{merge}.
  6017. @item flags
  6018. Specify flags influencing the filter process.
  6019. Available value for @var{flags} is:
  6020. @table @option
  6021. @item low_pass_filter, vlfp
  6022. Enable vertical low-pass filtering in the filter.
  6023. Vertical low-pass filtering is required when creating an interlaced
  6024. destination from a progressive source which contains high-frequency
  6025. vertical detail. Filtering will reduce interlace 'twitter' and Moire
  6026. patterning.
  6027. Vertical low-pass filtering can only be enabled for @option{mode}
  6028. @var{interleave_top} and @var{interleave_bottom}.
  6029. @end table
  6030. @end table
  6031. @section transpose
  6032. Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.
  6033. This filter accepts the following options:
  6034. @table @option
  6035. @item dir
  6036. Specify the transposition direction.
  6037. Can assume the following values:
  6038. @table @samp
  6039. @item 0, 4, cclock_flip
  6040. Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip (default), that is:
  6041. @example
  6042. L.R L.l
  6043. . . -> . .
  6044. l.r R.r
  6045. @end example
  6046. @item 1, 5, clock
  6047. Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise, that is:
  6048. @example
  6049. L.R l.L
  6050. . . -> . .
  6051. l.r r.R
  6052. @end example
  6053. @item 2, 6, cclock
  6054. Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise, that is:
  6055. @example
  6056. L.R R.r
  6057. . . -> . .
  6058. l.r L.l
  6059. @end example
  6060. @item 3, 7, clock_flip
  6061. Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip, that is:
  6062. @example
  6063. L.R r.R
  6064. . . -> . .
  6065. l.r l.L
  6066. @end example
  6067. @end table
  6068. For values between 4-7, the transposition is only done if the input
  6069. video geometry is portrait and not landscape. These values are
  6070. deprecated, the @code{passthrough} option should be used instead.
  6071. Numerical values are deprecated, and should be dropped in favor of
  6072. symbolic constants.
  6073. @item passthrough
  6074. Do not apply the transposition if the input geometry matches the one
  6075. specified by the specified value. It accepts the following values:
  6076. @table @samp
  6077. @item none
  6078. Always apply transposition.
  6079. @item portrait
  6080. Preserve portrait geometry (when @var{height} >= @var{width}).
  6081. @item landscape
  6082. Preserve landscape geometry (when @var{width} >= @var{height}).
  6083. @end table
  6084. Default value is @code{none}.
  6085. @end table
  6086. For example to rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and preserve portrait
  6087. layout:
  6088. @example
  6089. transpose=dir=1:passthrough=portrait
  6090. @end example
  6091. The command above can also be specified as:
  6092. @example
  6093. transpose=1:portrait
  6094. @end example
  6095. @section trim
  6096. Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
  6097. This filter accepts the following options:
  6098. @table @option
  6099. @item start
  6100. Specify time of the start of the kept section, i.e. the frame with the
  6101. timestamp @var{start} will be the first frame in the output.
  6102. @item end
  6103. Specify time of the first frame that will be dropped, i.e. the frame
  6104. immediately preceding the one with the timestamp @var{end} will be the last
  6105. frame in the output.
  6106. @item start_pts
  6107. Same as @var{start}, except this option sets the start timestamp in timebase
  6108. units instead of seconds.
  6109. @item end_pts
  6110. Same as @var{end}, except this option sets the end timestamp in timebase units
  6111. instead of seconds.
  6112. @item duration
  6113. Specify maximum duration of the output.
  6114. @item start_frame
  6115. Number of the first frame that should be passed to output.
  6116. @item end_frame
  6117. Number of the first frame that should be dropped.
  6118. @end table
  6119. @option{start}, @option{end}, @option{duration} are expressed as time
  6120. duration specifications, check the "Time duration" section in the
  6121. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  6122. Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the @option{duration}
  6123. option look at the frame timestamp, while the _frame variants simply count the
  6124. frames that pass through the filter. Also note that this filter does not modify
  6125. the timestamps. If you wish that the output timestamps start at zero, insert a
  6126. setpts filter after the trim filter.
  6127. If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
  6128. keep all the frames that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
  6129. only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple trim
  6130. filters.
  6131. The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
  6132. just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
  6133. Examples:
  6134. @itemize
  6135. @item
  6136. drop everything except the second minute of input
  6137. @example
  6138. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=60:120
  6139. @end example
  6140. @item
  6141. keep only the first second
  6142. @example
  6143. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=duration=1
  6144. @end example
  6145. @end itemize
  6146. @section unsharp
  6147. Sharpen or blur the input video.
  6148. It accepts the following parameters:
  6149. @table @option
  6150. @item luma_msize_x, lx
  6151. Set the luma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer between
  6152. 3 and 63, default value is 5.
  6153. @item luma_msize_y, ly
  6154. Set the luma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer between 3
  6155. and 63, default value is 5.
  6156. @item luma_amount, la
  6157. Set the luma effect strength. It can be a float number, reasonable
  6158. values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
  6159. Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
  6160. sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
  6161. Default value is 1.0.
  6162. @item chroma_msize_x, cx
  6163. Set the chroma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer
  6164. between 3 and 63, default value is 5.
  6165. @item chroma_msize_y, cy
  6166. Set the chroma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer
  6167. between 3 and 63, default value is 5.
  6168. @item chroma_amount, ca
  6169. Set the chroma effect strength. It can be a float number, reasonable
  6170. values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
  6171. Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
  6172. sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
  6173. Default value is 0.0.
  6174. @item opencl
  6175. If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
  6176. FFmpeg was configured with @code{--enable-opencl}. Default value is 0.
  6177. @end table
  6178. All parameters are optional and default to the equivalent of the
  6179. string '5:5:1.0:5:5:0.0'.
  6180. @subsection Examples
  6181. @itemize
  6182. @item
  6183. Apply strong luma sharpen effect:
  6184. @example
  6185. unsharp=luma_msize_x=7:luma_msize_y=7:luma_amount=2.5
  6186. @end example
  6187. @item
  6188. Apply strong blur of both luma and chroma parameters:
  6189. @example
  6190. unsharp=7:7:-2:7:7:-2
  6191. @end example
  6192. @end itemize
  6193. @anchor{vidstabdetect}
  6194. @section vidstabdetect
  6195. Analyze video stabilization/deshaking. Perform pass 1 of 2, see
  6196. @ref{vidstabtransform} for pass 2.
  6197. This filter generates a file with relative translation and rotation
  6198. transform information about subsequent frames, which is then used by
  6199. the @ref{vidstabtransform} filter.
  6200. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  6201. @code{--enable-libvidstab}.
  6202. This filter accepts the following options:
  6203. @table @option
  6204. @item result
  6205. Set the path to the file used to write the transforms information.
  6206. Default value is @file{transforms.trf}.
  6207. @item shakiness
  6208. Set how shaky the video is and how quick the camera is. It accepts an
  6209. integer in the range 1-10, a value of 1 means little shakiness, a
  6210. value of 10 means strong shakiness. Default value is 5.
  6211. @item accuracy
  6212. Set the accuracy of the detection process. It must be a value in the
  6213. range 1-15. A value of 1 means low accuracy, a value of 15 means high
  6214. accuracy. Default value is 15.
  6215. @item stepsize
  6216. Set stepsize of the search process. The region around minimum is
  6217. scanned with 1 pixel resolution. Default value is 6.
  6218. @item mincontrast
  6219. Set minimum contrast. Below this value a local measurement field is
  6220. discarded. Must be a floating point value in the range 0-1. Default
  6221. value is 0.3.
  6222. @item tripod
  6223. Set reference frame number for tripod mode.
  6224. If enabled, the motion of the frames is compared to a reference frame
  6225. in the filtered stream, identified by the specified number. The idea
  6226. is to compensate all movements in a more-or-less static scene and keep
  6227. the camera view absolutely still.
  6228. If set to 0, it is disabled. The frames are counted starting from 1.
  6229. @item show
  6230. Show fields and transforms in the resulting frames. It accepts an
  6231. integer in the range 0-2. Default value is 0, which disables any
  6232. visualization.
  6233. @end table
  6234. @subsection Examples
  6235. @itemize
  6236. @item
  6237. Use default values:
  6238. @example
  6239. vidstabdetect
  6240. @end example
  6241. @item
  6242. Analyze strongly shaky movie and put the results in file
  6243. @file{mytransforms.trf}:
  6244. @example
  6245. vidstabdetect=shakiness=10:accuracy=15:result="mytransforms.trf"
  6246. @end example
  6247. @item
  6248. Visualize the result of internal transformations in the resulting
  6249. video:
  6250. @example
  6251. vidstabdetect=show=1
  6252. @end example
  6253. @item
  6254. Analyze a video with medium shakiness using @command{ffmpeg}:
  6255. @example
  6256. ffmpeg -i input -vf vidstabdetect=shakiness=5:show=1 dummy.avi
  6257. @end example
  6258. @end itemize
  6259. @anchor{vidstabtransform}
  6260. @section vidstabtransform
  6261. Video stabilization/deshaking: pass 2 of 2,
  6262. see @ref{vidstabdetect} for pass 1.
  6263. Read a file with transform information for each frame and
  6264. apply/compensate them. Together with the @ref{vidstabdetect}
  6265. filter this can be used to deshake videos. See also
  6266. @url{http://public.hronopik.de/vid.stab}. It is important to also use
  6267. the unsharp filter, see below.
  6268. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  6269. @code{--enable-libvidstab}.
  6270. @subsection Options
  6271. @table @option
  6272. @item input
  6273. Set path to the file used to read the transforms. Default value is
  6274. @file{transforms.trf}).
  6275. @item smoothing
  6276. Set the number of frames (value*2 + 1) used for lowpass filtering the
  6277. camera movements. Default value is 10.
  6278. For example a number of 10 means that 21 frames are used (10 in the
  6279. past and 10 in the future) to smoothen the motion in the video. A
  6280. larger values leads to a smoother video, but limits the acceleration
  6281. of the camera (pan/tilt movements). 0 is a special case where a
  6282. static camera is simulated.
  6283. @item optalgo
  6284. Set the camera path optimization algorithm.
  6285. Accepted values are:
  6286. @table @samp
  6287. @item gauss
  6288. gaussian kernel low-pass filter on camera motion (default)
  6289. @item avg
  6290. averaging on transformations
  6291. @end table
  6292. @item maxshift
  6293. Set maximal number of pixels to translate frames. Default value is -1,
  6294. meaning no limit.
  6295. @item maxangle
  6296. Set maximal angle in radians (degree*PI/180) to rotate frames. Default
  6297. value is -1, meaning no limit.
  6298. @item crop
  6299. Specify how to deal with borders that may be visible due to movement
  6300. compensation.
  6301. Available values are:
  6302. @table @samp
  6303. @item keep
  6304. keep image information from previous frame (default)
  6305. @item black
  6306. fill the border black
  6307. @end table
  6308. @item invert
  6309. Invert transforms if set to 1. Default value is 0.
  6310. @item relative
  6311. Consider transforms as relative to previsou frame if set to 1,
  6312. absolute if set to 0. Default value is 0.
  6313. @item zoom
  6314. Set percentage to zoom. A positive value will result in a zoom-in
  6315. effect, a negative value in a zoom-out effect. Default value is 0 (no
  6316. zoom).
  6317. @item optzoom
  6318. Set optimal zooming to avoid borders.
  6319. Accepted values are:
  6320. @table @samp
  6321. @item 0
  6322. disabled
  6323. @item 1
  6324. optimal static zoom value is determined (only very strong movements
  6325. will lead to visible borders) (default)
  6326. @item 2
  6327. optimal adaptive zoom value is determined (no borders will be
  6328. visible), see @option{zoomspeed}
  6329. @end table
  6330. Note that the value given at zoom is added to the one calculated here.
  6331. @item zoomspeed
  6332. Set percent to zoom maximally each frame (enabled when
  6333. @option{optzoom} is set to 2). Range is from 0 to 5, default value is
  6334. 0.25.
  6335. @item interpol
  6336. Specify type of interpolation.
  6337. Available values are:
  6338. @table @samp
  6339. @item no
  6340. no interpolation
  6341. @item linear
  6342. linear only horizontal
  6343. @item bilinear
  6344. linear in both directions (default)
  6345. @item bicubic
  6346. cubic in both directions (slow)
  6347. @end table
  6348. @item tripod
  6349. Enable virtual tripod mode if set to 1, which is equivalent to
  6350. @code{relative=0:smoothing=0}. Default value is 0.
  6351. Use also @code{tripod} option of @ref{vidstabdetect}.
  6352. @item debug
  6353. Increase log verbosity if set to 1. Also the detected global motions
  6354. are written to the temporary file @file{global_motions.trf}. Default
  6355. value is 0.
  6356. @end table
  6357. @subsection Examples
  6358. @itemize
  6359. @item
  6360. Use @command{ffmpeg} for a typical stabilization with default values:
  6361. @example
  6362. ffmpeg -i inp.mpeg -vf vidstabtransform,unsharp=5:5:0.8:3:3:0.4 inp_stabilized.mpeg
  6363. @end example
  6364. Note the use of the unsharp filter which is always recommended.
  6365. @item
  6366. Zoom in a bit more and load transform data from a given file:
  6367. @example
  6368. vidstabtransform=zoom=5:input="mytransforms.trf"
  6369. @end example
  6370. @item
  6371. Smoothen the video even more:
  6372. @example
  6373. vidstabtransform=smoothing=30
  6374. @end example
  6375. @end itemize
  6376. @section vflip
  6377. Flip the input video vertically.
  6378. For example, to vertically flip a video with @command{ffmpeg}:
  6379. @example
  6380. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "vflip" out.avi
  6381. @end example
  6382. @section vignette
  6383. Make or reverse a natural vignetting effect.
  6384. The filter accepts the following options:
  6385. @table @option
  6386. @item angle, a
  6387. Set lens angle expression as a number of radians.
  6388. The value is clipped in the @code{[0,PI/2]} range.
  6389. Default value: @code{"PI/5"}
  6390. @item x0
  6391. @item y0
  6392. Set center coordinates expressions. Respectively @code{"w/2"} and @code{"h/2"}
  6393. by default.
  6394. @item mode
  6395. Set forward/backward mode.
  6396. Available modes are:
  6397. @table @samp
  6398. @item forward
  6399. The larger the distance from the central point, the darker the image becomes.
  6400. @item backward
  6401. The larger the distance from the central point, the brighter the image becomes.
  6402. This can be used to reverse a vignette effect, though there is no automatic
  6403. detection to extract the lens @option{angle} and other settings (yet). It can
  6404. also be used to create a burning effect.
  6405. @end table
  6406. Default value is @samp{forward}.
  6407. @item eval
  6408. Set evaluation mode for the expressions (@option{angle}, @option{x0}, @option{y0}).
  6409. It accepts the following values:
  6410. @table @samp
  6411. @item init
  6412. Evaluate expressions only once during the filter initialization.
  6413. @item frame
  6414. Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame. This is way slower than the
  6415. @samp{init} mode since it requires all the scalers to be re-computed, but it
  6416. allows advanced dynamic expressions.
  6417. @end table
  6418. Default value is @samp{init}.
  6419. @item dither
  6420. Set dithering to reduce the circular banding effects. Default is @code{1}
  6421. (enabled).
  6422. @item aspect
  6423. Set vignette aspect. This setting allows to adjust the shape of the vignette.
  6424. Setting this value to the SAR of the input will make a rectangular vignetting
  6425. following the dimensions of the video.
  6426. Default is @code{1/1}.
  6427. @end table
  6428. @subsection Expressions
  6429. The @option{alpha}, @option{x0} and @option{y0} expressions can contain the
  6430. following parameters.
  6431. @table @option
  6432. @item w
  6433. @item h
  6434. input width and height
  6435. @item n
  6436. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  6437. @item pts
  6438. the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) time of the filtered video frame, expressed in
  6439. @var{TB} units, NAN if undefined
  6440. @item r
  6441. frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
  6442. @item t
  6443. the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
  6444. expressed in seconds, NAN if undefined
  6445. @item tb
  6446. time base of the input video
  6447. @end table
  6448. @subsection Examples
  6449. @itemize
  6450. @item
  6451. Apply simple strong vignetting effect:
  6452. @example
  6453. vignette=PI/4
  6454. @end example
  6455. @item
  6456. Make a flickering vignetting:
  6457. @example
  6458. vignette='PI/4+random(1)*PI/50':eval=frame
  6459. @end example
  6460. @end itemize
  6461. @section w3fdif
  6462. Deinterlace the input video ("w3fdif" stands for "Weston 3 Field
  6463. Deinterlacing Filter").
  6464. Based on the process described by Martin Weston for BBC R&D, and
  6465. implemented based on the de-interlace algorithm written by Jim
  6466. Easterbrook for BBC R&D, the Weston 3 field deinterlacing filter
  6467. uses filter coefficients calculated by BBC R&D.
  6468. There are two sets of filter coefficients, so called "simple":
  6469. and "complex". Which set of filter coefficients is used can
  6470. be set by passing an optional parameter:
  6471. @table @option
  6472. @item filter
  6473. Set the interlacing filter coefficients. Accepts one of the following values:
  6474. @table @samp
  6475. @item simple
  6476. Simple filter coefficient set.
  6477. @item complex
  6478. More-complex filter coefficient set.
  6479. @end table
  6480. Default value is @samp{complex}.
  6481. @item deint
  6482. Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following values:
  6483. @table @samp
  6484. @item all
  6485. Deinterlace all frames,
  6486. @item interlaced
  6487. Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
  6488. @end table
  6489. Default value is @samp{all}.
  6490. @end table
  6491. @anchor{yadif}
  6492. @section yadif
  6493. Deinterlace the input video ("yadif" means "yet another deinterlacing
  6494. filter").
  6495. This filter accepts the following options:
  6496. @table @option
  6497. @item mode
  6498. The interlacing mode to adopt, accepts one of the following values:
  6499. @table @option
  6500. @item 0, send_frame
  6501. output 1 frame for each frame
  6502. @item 1, send_field
  6503. output 1 frame for each field
  6504. @item 2, send_frame_nospatial
  6505. like @code{send_frame} but skip spatial interlacing check
  6506. @item 3, send_field_nospatial
  6507. like @code{send_field} but skip spatial interlacing check
  6508. @end table
  6509. Default value is @code{send_frame}.
  6510. @item parity
  6511. The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video, accepts one of
  6512. the following values:
  6513. @table @option
  6514. @item 0, tff
  6515. assume top field first
  6516. @item 1, bff
  6517. assume bottom field first
  6518. @item -1, auto
  6519. enable automatic detection
  6520. @end table
  6521. Default value is @code{auto}.
  6522. If interlacing is unknown or decoder does not export this information,
  6523. top field first will be assumed.
  6524. @item deint
  6525. Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following
  6526. values:
  6527. @table @option
  6528. @item 0, all
  6529. deinterlace all frames
  6530. @item 1, interlaced
  6531. only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced
  6532. @end table
  6533. Default value is @code{all}.
  6534. @end table
  6535. @c man end VIDEO FILTERS
  6536. @chapter Video Sources
  6537. @c man begin VIDEO SOURCES
  6538. Below is a description of the currently available video sources.
  6539. @section buffer
  6540. Buffer video frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
  6541. This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
  6542. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/vsrc_buffer.h}.
  6543. This source accepts the following options:
  6544. @table @option
  6545. @item video_size
  6546. Specify the size (width and height) of the buffered video frames. For the
  6547. syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils
  6548. manual.
  6549. @item width
  6550. Input video width.
  6551. @item height
  6552. Input video height.
  6553. @item pix_fmt
  6554. A string representing the pixel format of the buffered video frames.
  6555. It may be a number corresponding to a pixel format, or a pixel format
  6556. name.
  6557. @item time_base
  6558. Specify the timebase assumed by the timestamps of the buffered frames.
  6559. @item frame_rate
  6560. Specify the frame rate expected for the video stream.
  6561. @item pixel_aspect, sar
  6562. Specify the sample aspect ratio assumed by the video frames.
  6563. @item sws_param
  6564. Specify the optional parameters to be used for the scale filter which
  6565. is automatically inserted when an input change is detected in the
  6566. input size or format.
  6567. @end table
  6568. For example:
  6569. @example
  6570. buffer=width=320:height=240:pix_fmt=yuv410p:time_base=1/24:sar=1
  6571. @end example
  6572. will instruct the source to accept video frames with size 320x240 and
  6573. with format "yuv410p", assuming 1/24 as the timestamps timebase and
  6574. square pixels (1:1 sample aspect ratio).
  6575. Since the pixel format with name "yuv410p" corresponds to the number 6
  6576. (check the enum AVPixelFormat definition in @file{libavutil/pixfmt.h}),
  6577. this example corresponds to:
  6578. @example
  6579. buffer=size=320x240:pixfmt=6:time_base=1/24:pixel_aspect=1/1
  6580. @end example
  6581. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string, but this
  6582. syntax is deprecated:
  6583. @var{width}:@var{height}:@var{pix_fmt}:@var{time_base.num}:@var{time_base.den}:@var{pixel_aspect.num}:@var{pixel_aspect.den}[:@var{sws_param}]
  6584. @section cellauto
  6585. Create a pattern generated by an elementary cellular automaton.
  6586. The initial state of the cellular automaton can be defined through the
  6587. @option{filename}, and @option{pattern} options. If such options are
  6588. not specified an initial state is created randomly.
  6589. At each new frame a new row in the video is filled with the result of
  6590. the cellular automaton next generation. The behavior when the whole
  6591. frame is filled is defined by the @option{scroll} option.
  6592. This source accepts the following options:
  6593. @table @option
  6594. @item filename, f
  6595. Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
  6596. the specified file.
  6597. In the file, each non-whitespace character is considered an alive
  6598. cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
  6599. file will be ignored.
  6600. @item pattern, p
  6601. Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
  6602. the specified string.
  6603. Each non-whitespace character in the string is considered an alive
  6604. cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
  6605. string will be ignored.
  6606. @item rate, r
  6607. Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
  6608. Default is 25.
  6609. @item random_fill_ratio, ratio
  6610. Set the random fill ratio for the initial cellular automaton row. It
  6611. is a floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to
  6612. 1/PHI.
  6613. This option is ignored when a file or a pattern is specified.
  6614. @item random_seed, seed
  6615. Set the seed for filling randomly the initial row, must be an integer
  6616. included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
  6617. set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
  6618. effort basis.
  6619. @item rule
  6620. Set the cellular automaton rule, it is a number ranging from 0 to 255.
  6621. Default value is 110.
  6622. @item size, s
  6623. Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check
  6624. the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  6625. If @option{filename} or @option{pattern} is specified, the size is set
  6626. by default to the width of the specified initial state row, and the
  6627. height is set to @var{width} * PHI.
  6628. If @option{size} is set, it must contain the width of the specified
  6629. pattern string, and the specified pattern will be centered in the
  6630. larger row.
  6631. If a filename or a pattern string is not specified, the size value
  6632. defaults to "320x518" (used for a randomly generated initial state).
  6633. @item scroll
  6634. If set to 1, scroll the output upward when all the rows in the output
  6635. have been already filled. If set to 0, the new generated row will be
  6636. written over the top row just after the bottom row is filled.
  6637. Defaults to 1.
  6638. @item start_full, full
  6639. If set to 1, completely fill the output with generated rows before
  6640. outputting the first frame.
  6641. This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
  6642. @item stitch
  6643. If set to 1, stitch the left and right row edges together.
  6644. This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
  6645. @end table
  6646. @subsection Examples
  6647. @itemize
  6648. @item
  6649. Read the initial state from @file{pattern}, and specify an output of
  6650. size 200x400.
  6651. @example
  6652. cellauto=f=pattern:s=200x400
  6653. @end example
  6654. @item
  6655. Generate a random initial row with a width of 200 cells, with a fill
  6656. ratio of 2/3:
  6657. @example
  6658. cellauto=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
  6659. @end example
  6660. @item
  6661. Create a pattern generated by rule 18 starting by a single alive cell
  6662. centered on an initial row with width 100:
  6663. @example
  6664. cellauto=p=@@:s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
  6665. @end example
  6666. @item
  6667. Specify a more elaborated initial pattern:
  6668. @example
  6669. cellauto=p='@@@@ @@ @@@@':s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
  6670. @end example
  6671. @end itemize
  6672. @section mandelbrot
  6673. Generate a Mandelbrot set fractal, and progressively zoom towards the
  6674. point specified with @var{start_x} and @var{start_y}.
  6675. This source accepts the following options:
  6676. @table @option
  6677. @item end_pts
  6678. Set the terminal pts value. Default value is 400.
  6679. @item end_scale
  6680. Set the terminal scale value.
  6681. Must be a floating point value. Default value is 0.3.
  6682. @item inner
  6683. Set the inner coloring mode, that is the algorithm used to draw the
  6684. Mandelbrot fractal internal region.
  6685. It shall assume one of the following values:
  6686. @table @option
  6687. @item black
  6688. Set black mode.
  6689. @item convergence
  6690. Show time until convergence.
  6691. @item mincol
  6692. Set color based on point closest to the origin of the iterations.
  6693. @item period
  6694. Set period mode.
  6695. @end table
  6696. Default value is @var{mincol}.
  6697. @item bailout
  6698. Set the bailout value. Default value is 10.0.
  6699. @item maxiter
  6700. Set the maximum of iterations performed by the rendering
  6701. algorithm. Default value is 7189.
  6702. @item outer
  6703. Set outer coloring mode.
  6704. It shall assume one of following values:
  6705. @table @option
  6706. @item iteration_count
  6707. Set iteration cound mode.
  6708. @item normalized_iteration_count
  6709. set normalized iteration count mode.
  6710. @end table
  6711. Default value is @var{normalized_iteration_count}.
  6712. @item rate, r
  6713. Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
  6714. value is "25".
  6715. @item size, s
  6716. Set frame size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video
  6717. size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is "640x480".
  6718. @item start_scale
  6719. Set the initial scale value. Default value is 3.0.
  6720. @item start_x
  6721. Set the initial x position. Must be a floating point value between
  6722. -100 and 100. Default value is -0.743643887037158704752191506114774.
  6723. @item start_y
  6724. Set the initial y position. Must be a floating point value between
  6725. -100 and 100. Default value is -0.131825904205311970493132056385139.
  6726. @end table
  6727. @section mptestsrc
  6728. Generate various test patterns, as generated by the MPlayer test filter.
  6729. The size of the generated video is fixed, and is 256x256.
  6730. This source is useful in particular for testing encoding features.
  6731. This source accepts the following options:
  6732. @table @option
  6733. @item rate, r
  6734. Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
  6735. generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
  6736. @var{frame_rate_num}/@var{frame_rate_den}, an integer number, a float
  6737. number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
  6738. "25".
  6739. @item duration, d
  6740. Set the video duration of the sourced video. The accepted syntax is:
  6741. @example
  6742. [-]HH:MM:SS[.m...]
  6743. [-]S+[.m...]
  6744. @end example
  6745. See also the function @code{av_parse_time()}.
  6746. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
  6747. supposed to be generated forever.
  6748. @item test, t
  6749. Set the number or the name of the test to perform. Supported tests are:
  6750. @table @option
  6751. @item dc_luma
  6752. @item dc_chroma
  6753. @item freq_luma
  6754. @item freq_chroma
  6755. @item amp_luma
  6756. @item amp_chroma
  6757. @item cbp
  6758. @item mv
  6759. @item ring1
  6760. @item ring2
  6761. @item all
  6762. @end table
  6763. Default value is "all", which will cycle through the list of all tests.
  6764. @end table
  6765. For example the following:
  6766. @example
  6767. testsrc=t=dc_luma
  6768. @end example
  6769. will generate a "dc_luma" test pattern.
  6770. @section frei0r_src
  6771. Provide a frei0r source.
  6772. To enable compilation of this filter you need to install the frei0r
  6773. header and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-frei0r}.
  6774. This source accepts the following options:
  6775. @table @option
  6776. @item size
  6777. The size of the video to generate. For the syntax of this option, check the
  6778. "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  6779. @item framerate
  6780. Framerate of the generated video, may be a string of the form
  6781. @var{num}/@var{den} or a frame rate abbreviation.
  6782. @item filter_name
  6783. The name to the frei0r source to load. For more information regarding frei0r and
  6784. how to set the parameters read the section @ref{frei0r} in the description of
  6785. the video filters.
  6786. @item filter_params
  6787. A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r source.
  6788. @end table
  6789. For example, to generate a frei0r partik0l source with size 200x200
  6790. and frame rate 10 which is overlayed on the overlay filter main input:
  6791. @example
  6792. frei0r_src=size=200x200:framerate=10:filter_name=partik0l:filter_params=1234 [overlay]; [in][overlay] overlay
  6793. @end example
  6794. @section life
  6795. Generate a life pattern.
  6796. This source is based on a generalization of John Conway's life game.
  6797. The sourced input represents a life grid, each pixel represents a cell
  6798. which can be in one of two possible states, alive or dead. Every cell
  6799. interacts with its eight neighbours, which are the cells that are
  6800. horizontally, vertically, or diagonally adjacent.
  6801. At each interaction the grid evolves according to the adopted rule,
  6802. which specifies the number of neighbor alive cells which will make a
  6803. cell stay alive or born. The @option{rule} option allows to specify
  6804. the rule to adopt.
  6805. This source accepts the following options:
  6806. @table @option
  6807. @item filename, f
  6808. Set the file from which to read the initial grid state. In the file,
  6809. each non-whitespace character is considered an alive cell, and newline
  6810. is used to delimit the end of each row.
  6811. If this option is not specified, the initial grid is generated
  6812. randomly.
  6813. @item rate, r
  6814. Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
  6815. Default is 25.
  6816. @item random_fill_ratio, ratio
  6817. Set the random fill ratio for the initial random grid. It is a
  6818. floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to 1/PHI.
  6819. It is ignored when a file is specified.
  6820. @item random_seed, seed
  6821. Set the seed for filling the initial random grid, must be an integer
  6822. included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
  6823. set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
  6824. effort basis.
  6825. @item rule
  6826. Set the life rule.
  6827. A rule can be specified with a code of the kind "S@var{NS}/B@var{NB}",
  6828. where @var{NS} and @var{NB} are sequences of numbers in the range 0-8,
  6829. @var{NS} specifies the number of alive neighbor cells which make a
  6830. live cell stay alive, and @var{NB} the number of alive neighbor cells
  6831. which make a dead cell to become alive (i.e. to "born").
  6832. "s" and "b" can be used in place of "S" and "B", respectively.
  6833. Alternatively a rule can be specified by an 18-bits integer. The 9
  6834. high order bits are used to encode the next cell state if it is alive
  6835. for each number of neighbor alive cells, the low order bits specify
  6836. the rule for "borning" new cells. Higher order bits encode for an
  6837. higher number of neighbor cells.
  6838. For example the number 6153 = @code{(12<<9)+9} specifies a stay alive
  6839. rule of 12 and a born rule of 9, which corresponds to "S23/B03".
  6840. Default value is "S23/B3", which is the original Conway's game of life
  6841. rule, and will keep a cell alive if it has 2 or 3 neighbor alive
  6842. cells, and will born a new cell if there are three alive cells around
  6843. a dead cell.
  6844. @item size, s
  6845. Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check the
  6846. "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  6847. If @option{filename} is specified, the size is set by default to the
  6848. same size of the input file. If @option{size} is set, it must contain
  6849. the size specified in the input file, and the initial grid defined in
  6850. that file is centered in the larger resulting area.
  6851. If a filename is not specified, the size value defaults to "320x240"
  6852. (used for a randomly generated initial grid).
  6853. @item stitch
  6854. If set to 1, stitch the left and right grid edges together, and the
  6855. top and bottom edges also. Defaults to 1.
  6856. @item mold
  6857. Set cell mold speed. If set, a dead cell will go from @option{death_color} to
  6858. @option{mold_color} with a step of @option{mold}. @option{mold} can have a
  6859. value from 0 to 255.
  6860. @item life_color
  6861. Set the color of living (or new born) cells.
  6862. @item death_color
  6863. Set the color of dead cells. If @option{mold} is set, this is the first color
  6864. used to represent a dead cell.
  6865. @item mold_color
  6866. Set mold color, for definitely dead and moldy cells.
  6867. For the syntax of these 3 color options, check the "Color" section in the
  6868. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  6869. @end table
  6870. @subsection Examples
  6871. @itemize
  6872. @item
  6873. Read a grid from @file{pattern}, and center it on a grid of size
  6874. 300x300 pixels:
  6875. @example
  6876. life=f=pattern:s=300x300
  6877. @end example
  6878. @item
  6879. Generate a random grid of size 200x200, with a fill ratio of 2/3:
  6880. @example
  6881. life=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
  6882. @end example
  6883. @item
  6884. Specify a custom rule for evolving a randomly generated grid:
  6885. @example
  6886. life=rule=S14/B34
  6887. @end example
  6888. @item
  6889. Full example with slow death effect (mold) using @command{ffplay}:
  6890. @example
  6891. ffplay -f lavfi life=s=300x200:mold=10:r=60:ratio=0.1:death_color=#C83232:life_color=#00ff00,scale=1200:800:flags=16
  6892. @end example
  6893. @end itemize
  6894. @anchor{color}
  6895. @anchor{haldclutsrc}
  6896. @anchor{nullsrc}
  6897. @anchor{rgbtestsrc}
  6898. @anchor{smptebars}
  6899. @anchor{smptehdbars}
  6900. @anchor{testsrc}
  6901. @section color, haldclutsrc, nullsrc, rgbtestsrc, smptebars, smptehdbars, testsrc
  6902. The @code{color} source provides an uniformly colored input.
  6903. The @code{haldclutsrc} source provides an identity Hald CLUT. See also
  6904. @ref{haldclut} filter.
  6905. The @code{nullsrc} source returns unprocessed video frames. It is
  6906. mainly useful to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as the
  6907. source for filters which ignore the input data.
  6908. The @code{rgbtestsrc} source generates an RGB test pattern useful for
  6909. detecting RGB vs BGR issues. You should see a red, green and blue
  6910. stripe from top to bottom.
  6911. The @code{smptebars} source generates a color bars pattern, based on
  6912. the SMPTE Engineering Guideline EG 1-1990.
  6913. The @code{smptehdbars} source generates a color bars pattern, based on
  6914. the SMPTE RP 219-2002.
  6915. The @code{testsrc} source generates a test video pattern, showing a
  6916. color pattern, a scrolling gradient and a timestamp. This is mainly
  6917. intended for testing purposes.
  6918. The sources accept the following options:
  6919. @table @option
  6920. @item color, c
  6921. Specify the color of the source, only available in the @code{color}
  6922. source. For the syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
  6923. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  6924. @item level
  6925. Specify the level of the Hald CLUT, only available in the @code{haldclutsrc}
  6926. source. A level of @code{N} generates a picture of @code{N*N*N} by @code{N*N*N}
  6927. pixels to be used as identity matrix for 3D lookup tables. Each component is
  6928. coded on a @code{1/(N*N)} scale.
  6929. @item size, s
  6930. Specify the size of the sourced video. For the syntax of this option, check the
  6931. "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value is
  6932. "320x240".
  6933. This option is not available with the @code{haldclutsrc} filter.
  6934. @item rate, r
  6935. Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
  6936. generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
  6937. @var{frame_rate_num}/@var{frame_rate_den}, an integer number, a float
  6938. number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
  6939. "25".
  6940. @item sar
  6941. Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.
  6942. @item duration, d
  6943. Set the video duration of the sourced video. The accepted syntax is:
  6944. @example
  6945. [-]HH[:MM[:SS[.m...]]]
  6946. [-]S+[.m...]
  6947. @end example
  6948. See also the function @code{av_parse_time()}.
  6949. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
  6950. supposed to be generated forever.
  6951. @item decimals, n
  6952. Set the number of decimals to show in the timestamp, only available in the
  6953. @code{testsrc} source.
  6954. The displayed timestamp value will correspond to the original
  6955. timestamp value multiplied by the power of 10 of the specified
  6956. value. Default value is 0.
  6957. @end table
  6958. For example the following:
  6959. @example
  6960. testsrc=duration=5.3:size=qcif:rate=10
  6961. @end example
  6962. will generate a video with a duration of 5.3 seconds, with size
  6963. 176x144 and a frame rate of 10 frames per second.
  6964. The following graph description will generate a red source
  6965. with an opacity of 0.2, with size "qcif" and a frame rate of 10
  6966. frames per second.
  6967. @example
  6968. color=c=red@@0.2:s=qcif:r=10
  6969. @end example
  6970. If the input content is to be ignored, @code{nullsrc} can be used. The
  6971. following command generates noise in the luminance plane by employing
  6972. the @code{geq} filter:
  6973. @example
  6974. nullsrc=s=256x256, geq=random(1)*255:128:128
  6975. @end example
  6976. @subsection Commands
  6977. The @code{color} source supports the following commands:
  6978. @table @option
  6979. @item c, color
  6980. Set the color of the created image. Accepts the same syntax of the
  6981. corresponding @option{color} option.
  6982. @end table
  6983. @c man end VIDEO SOURCES
  6984. @chapter Video Sinks
  6985. @c man begin VIDEO SINKS
  6986. Below is a description of the currently available video sinks.
  6987. @section buffersink
  6988. Buffer video frames, and make them available to the end of the filter
  6989. graph.
  6990. This sink is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
  6991. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/buffersink.h}
  6992. or the options system.
  6993. It accepts a pointer to an AVBufferSinkContext structure, which
  6994. defines the incoming buffers' formats, to be passed as the opaque
  6995. parameter to @code{avfilter_init_filter} for initialization.
  6996. @section nullsink
  6997. Null video sink, do absolutely nothing with the input video. It is
  6998. mainly useful as a template and to be employed in analysis / debugging
  6999. tools.
  7000. @c man end VIDEO SINKS
  7001. @chapter Multimedia Filters
  7002. @c man begin MULTIMEDIA FILTERS
  7003. Below is a description of the currently available multimedia filters.
  7004. @section avectorscope
  7005. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio vector
  7006. scope.
  7007. The filter is used to measure the difference between channels of stereo
  7008. audio stream. A monoaural signal, consisting of identical left and right
  7009. signal, results in straight vertical line. Any stereo separation is visible
  7010. as a deviation from this line, creating a Lissajous figure.
  7011. If the straight (or deviation from it) but horizontal line appears this
  7012. indicates that the left and right channels are out of phase.
  7013. The filter accepts the following options:
  7014. @table @option
  7015. @item mode, m
  7016. Set the vectorscope mode.
  7017. Available values are:
  7018. @table @samp
  7019. @item lissajous
  7020. Lissajous rotated by 45 degrees.
  7021. @item lissajous_xy
  7022. Same as above but not rotated.
  7023. @end table
  7024. Default value is @samp{lissajous}.
  7025. @item size, s
  7026. Set the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
  7027. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is @code{400x400}.
  7028. @item rate, r
  7029. Set the output frame rate. Default value is @code{25}.
  7030. @item rc
  7031. @item gc
  7032. @item bc
  7033. Specify the red, green and blue contrast. Default values are @code{40}, @code{160} and @code{80}.
  7034. Allowed range is @code{[0, 255]}.
  7035. @item rf
  7036. @item gf
  7037. @item bf
  7038. Specify the red, green and blue fade. Default values are @code{15}, @code{10} and @code{5}.
  7039. Allowed range is @code{[0, 255]}.
  7040. @item zoom
  7041. Set the zoom factor. Default value is @code{1}. Allowed range is @code{[1, 10]}.
  7042. @end table
  7043. @subsection Examples
  7044. @itemize
  7045. @item
  7046. Complete example using @command{ffplay}:
  7047. @example
  7048. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
  7049. [a] avectorscope=zoom=1.3:rc=2:gc=200:bc=10:rf=1:gf=8:bf=7 [out0]'
  7050. @end example
  7051. @end itemize
  7052. @section concat
  7053. Concatenate audio and video streams, joining them together one after the
  7054. other.
  7055. The filter works on segments of synchronized video and audio streams. All
  7056. segments must have the same number of streams of each type, and that will
  7057. also be the number of streams at output.
  7058. The filter accepts the following options:
  7059. @table @option
  7060. @item n
  7061. Set the number of segments. Default is 2.
  7062. @item v
  7063. Set the number of output video streams, that is also the number of video
  7064. streams in each segment. Default is 1.
  7065. @item a
  7066. Set the number of output audio streams, that is also the number of video
  7067. streams in each segment. Default is 0.
  7068. @item unsafe
  7069. Activate unsafe mode: do not fail if segments have a different format.
  7070. @end table
  7071. The filter has @var{v}+@var{a} outputs: first @var{v} video outputs, then
  7072. @var{a} audio outputs.
  7073. There are @var{n}x(@var{v}+@var{a}) inputs: first the inputs for the first
  7074. segment, in the same order as the outputs, then the inputs for the second
  7075. segment, etc.
  7076. Related streams do not always have exactly the same duration, for various
  7077. reasons including codec frame size or sloppy authoring. For that reason,
  7078. related synchronized streams (e.g. a video and its audio track) should be
  7079. concatenated at once. The concat filter will use the duration of the longest
  7080. stream in each segment (except the last one), and if necessary pad shorter
  7081. audio streams with silence.
  7082. For this filter to work correctly, all segments must start at timestamp 0.
  7083. All corresponding streams must have the same parameters in all segments; the
  7084. filtering system will automatically select a common pixel format for video
  7085. streams, and a common sample format, sample rate and channel layout for
  7086. audio streams, but other settings, such as resolution, must be converted
  7087. explicitly by the user.
  7088. Different frame rates are acceptable but will result in variable frame rate
  7089. at output; be sure to configure the output file to handle it.
  7090. @subsection Examples
  7091. @itemize
  7092. @item
  7093. Concatenate an opening, an episode and an ending, all in bilingual version
  7094. (video in stream 0, audio in streams 1 and 2):
  7095. @example
  7096. ffmpeg -i opening.mkv -i episode.mkv -i ending.mkv -filter_complex \
  7097. '[0:0] [0:1] [0:2] [1:0] [1:1] [1:2] [2:0] [2:1] [2:2]
  7098. concat=n=3:v=1:a=2 [v] [a1] [a2]' \
  7099. -map '[v]' -map '[a1]' -map '[a2]' output.mkv
  7100. @end example
  7101. @item
  7102. Concatenate two parts, handling audio and video separately, using the
  7103. (a)movie sources, and adjusting the resolution:
  7104. @example
  7105. movie=part1.mp4, scale=512:288 [v1] ; amovie=part1.mp4 [a1] ;
  7106. movie=part2.mp4, scale=512:288 [v2] ; amovie=part2.mp4 [a2] ;
  7107. [v1] [v2] concat [outv] ; [a1] [a2] concat=v=0:a=1 [outa]
  7108. @end example
  7109. Note that a desync will happen at the stitch if the audio and video streams
  7110. do not have exactly the same duration in the first file.
  7111. @end itemize
  7112. @section ebur128
  7113. EBU R128 scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as input and outputs
  7114. it unchanged. By default, it logs a message at a frequency of 10Hz with the
  7115. Momentary loudness (identified by @code{M}), Short-term loudness (@code{S}),
  7116. Integrated loudness (@code{I}) and Loudness Range (@code{LRA}).
  7117. The filter also has a video output (see the @var{video} option) with a real
  7118. time graph to observe the loudness evolution. The graphic contains the logged
  7119. message mentioned above, so it is not printed anymore when this option is set,
  7120. unless the verbose logging is set. The main graphing area contains the
  7121. short-term loudness (3 seconds of analysis), and the gauge on the right is for
  7122. the momentary loudness (400 milliseconds).
  7123. More information about the Loudness Recommendation EBU R128 on
  7124. @url{http://tech.ebu.ch/loudness}.
  7125. The filter accepts the following options:
  7126. @table @option
  7127. @item video
  7128. Activate the video output. The audio stream is passed unchanged whether this
  7129. option is set or no. The video stream will be the first output stream if
  7130. activated. Default is @code{0}.
  7131. @item size
  7132. Set the video size. This option is for video only. For the syntax of this
  7133. option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default
  7134. and minimum resolution is @code{640x480}.
  7135. @item meter
  7136. Set the EBU scale meter. Default is @code{9}. Common values are @code{9} and
  7137. @code{18}, respectively for EBU scale meter +9 and EBU scale meter +18. Any
  7138. other integer value between this range is allowed.
  7139. @item metadata
  7140. Set metadata injection. If set to @code{1}, the audio input will be segmented
  7141. into 100ms output frames, each of them containing various loudness information
  7142. in metadata. All the metadata keys are prefixed with @code{lavfi.r128.}.
  7143. Default is @code{0}.
  7144. @item framelog
  7145. Force the frame logging level.
  7146. Available values are:
  7147. @table @samp
  7148. @item info
  7149. information logging level
  7150. @item verbose
  7151. verbose logging level
  7152. @end table
  7153. By default, the logging level is set to @var{info}. If the @option{video} or
  7154. the @option{metadata} options are set, it switches to @var{verbose}.
  7155. @item peak
  7156. Set peak mode(s).
  7157. Available modes can be cumulated (the option is a @code{flag} type). Possible
  7158. values are:
  7159. @table @samp
  7160. @item none
  7161. Disable any peak mode (default).
  7162. @item sample
  7163. Enable sample-peak mode.
  7164. Simple peak mode looking for the higher sample value. It logs a message
  7165. for sample-peak (identified by @code{SPK}).
  7166. @item true
  7167. Enable true-peak mode.
  7168. If enabled, the peak lookup is done on an over-sampled version of the input
  7169. stream for better peak accuracy. It logs a message for true-peak.
  7170. (identified by @code{TPK}) and true-peak per frame (identified by @code{FTPK}).
  7171. This mode requires a build with @code{libswresample}.
  7172. @end table
  7173. @end table
  7174. @subsection Examples
  7175. @itemize
  7176. @item
  7177. Real-time graph using @command{ffplay}, with a EBU scale meter +18:
  7178. @example
  7179. ffplay -f lavfi -i "amovie=input.mp3,ebur128=video=1:meter=18 [out0][out1]"
  7180. @end example
  7181. @item
  7182. Run an analysis with @command{ffmpeg}:
  7183. @example
  7184. ffmpeg -nostats -i input.mp3 -filter_complex ebur128 -f null -
  7185. @end example
  7186. @end itemize
  7187. @section interleave, ainterleave
  7188. Temporally interleave frames from several inputs.
  7189. @code{interleave} works with video inputs, @code{ainterleave} with audio.
  7190. These filters read frames from several inputs and send the oldest
  7191. queued frame to the output.
  7192. Input streams must have a well defined, monotonically increasing frame
  7193. timestamp values.
  7194. In order to submit one frame to output, these filters need to enqueue
  7195. at least one frame for each input, so they cannot work in case one
  7196. input is not yet terminated and will not receive incoming frames.
  7197. For example consider the case when one input is a @code{select} filter
  7198. which always drop input frames. The @code{interleave} filter will keep
  7199. reading from that input, but it will never be able to send new frames
  7200. to output until the input will send an end-of-stream signal.
  7201. Also, depending on inputs synchronization, the filters will drop
  7202. frames in case one input receives more frames than the other ones, and
  7203. the queue is already filled.
  7204. These filters accept the following options:
  7205. @table @option
  7206. @item nb_inputs, n
  7207. Set the number of different inputs, it is 2 by default.
  7208. @end table
  7209. @subsection Examples
  7210. @itemize
  7211. @item
  7212. Interleave frames belonging to different streams using @command{ffmpeg}:
  7213. @example
  7214. ffmpeg -i bambi.avi -i pr0n.mkv -filter_complex "[0:v][1:v] interleave" out.avi
  7215. @end example
  7216. @item
  7217. Add flickering blur effect:
  7218. @example
  7219. select='if(gt(random(0), 0.2), 1, 2)':n=2 [tmp], boxblur=2:2, [tmp] interleave
  7220. @end example
  7221. @end itemize
  7222. @section perms, aperms
  7223. Set read/write permissions for the output frames.
  7224. These filters are mainly aimed at developers to test direct path in the
  7225. following filter in the filtergraph.
  7226. The filters accept the following options:
  7227. @table @option
  7228. @item mode
  7229. Select the permissions mode.
  7230. It accepts the following values:
  7231. @table @samp
  7232. @item none
  7233. Do nothing. This is the default.
  7234. @item ro
  7235. Set all the output frames read-only.
  7236. @item rw
  7237. Set all the output frames directly writable.
  7238. @item toggle
  7239. Make the frame read-only if writable, and writable if read-only.
  7240. @item random
  7241. Set each output frame read-only or writable randomly.
  7242. @end table
  7243. @item seed
  7244. Set the seed for the @var{random} mode, must be an integer included between
  7245. @code{0} and @code{UINT32_MAX}. If not specified, or if explicitly set to
  7246. @code{-1}, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best effort
  7247. basis.
  7248. @end table
  7249. Note: in case of auto-inserted filter between the permission filter and the
  7250. following one, the permission might not be received as expected in that
  7251. following filter. Inserting a @ref{format} or @ref{aformat} filter before the
  7252. perms/aperms filter can avoid this problem.
  7253. @section select, aselect
  7254. Select frames to pass in output.
  7255. This filter accepts the following options:
  7256. @table @option
  7257. @item expr, e
  7258. Set expression, which is evaluated for each input frame.
  7259. If the expression is evaluated to zero, the frame is discarded.
  7260. If the evaluation result is negative or NaN, the frame is sent to the
  7261. first output; otherwise it is sent to the output with index
  7262. @code{ceil(val)-1}, assuming that the input index starts from 0.
  7263. For example a value of @code{1.2} corresponds to the output with index
  7264. @code{ceil(1.2)-1 = 2-1 = 1}, that is the second output.
  7265. @item outputs, n
  7266. Set the number of outputs. The output to which to send the selected
  7267. frame is based on the result of the evaluation. Default value is 1.
  7268. @end table
  7269. The expression can contain the following constants:
  7270. @table @option
  7271. @item n
  7272. the sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from 0
  7273. @item selected_n
  7274. the sequential number of the selected frame, starting from 0
  7275. @item prev_selected_n
  7276. the sequential number of the last selected frame, NAN if undefined
  7277. @item TB
  7278. timebase of the input timestamps
  7279. @item pts
  7280. the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
  7281. expressed in @var{TB} units, NAN if undefined
  7282. @item t
  7283. the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
  7284. expressed in seconds, NAN if undefined
  7285. @item prev_pts
  7286. the PTS of the previously filtered video frame, NAN if undefined
  7287. @item prev_selected_pts
  7288. the PTS of the last previously filtered video frame, NAN if undefined
  7289. @item prev_selected_t
  7290. the PTS of the last previously selected video frame, NAN if undefined
  7291. @item start_pts
  7292. the PTS of the first video frame in the video, NAN if undefined
  7293. @item start_t
  7294. the time of the first video frame in the video, NAN if undefined
  7295. @item pict_type @emph{(video only)}
  7296. the type of the filtered frame, can assume one of the following
  7297. values:
  7298. @table @option
  7299. @item I
  7300. @item P
  7301. @item B
  7302. @item S
  7303. @item SI
  7304. @item SP
  7305. @item BI
  7306. @end table
  7307. @item interlace_type @emph{(video only)}
  7308. the frame interlace type, can assume one of the following values:
  7309. @table @option
  7310. @item PROGRESSIVE
  7311. the frame is progressive (not interlaced)
  7312. @item TOPFIRST
  7313. the frame is top-field-first
  7314. @item BOTTOMFIRST
  7315. the frame is bottom-field-first
  7316. @end table
  7317. @item consumed_sample_n @emph{(audio only)}
  7318. the number of selected samples before the current frame
  7319. @item samples_n @emph{(audio only)}
  7320. the number of samples in the current frame
  7321. @item sample_rate @emph{(audio only)}
  7322. the input sample rate
  7323. @item key
  7324. 1 if the filtered frame is a key-frame, 0 otherwise
  7325. @item pos
  7326. the position in the file of the filtered frame, -1 if the information
  7327. is not available (e.g. for synthetic video)
  7328. @item scene @emph{(video only)}
  7329. value between 0 and 1 to indicate a new scene; a low value reflects a low
  7330. probability for the current frame to introduce a new scene, while a higher
  7331. value means the current frame is more likely to be one (see the example below)
  7332. @end table
  7333. The default value of the select expression is "1".
  7334. @subsection Examples
  7335. @itemize
  7336. @item
  7337. Select all frames in input:
  7338. @example
  7339. select
  7340. @end example
  7341. The example above is the same as:
  7342. @example
  7343. select=1
  7344. @end example
  7345. @item
  7346. Skip all frames:
  7347. @example
  7348. select=0
  7349. @end example
  7350. @item
  7351. Select only I-frames:
  7352. @example
  7353. select='eq(pict_type\,I)'
  7354. @end example
  7355. @item
  7356. Select one frame every 100:
  7357. @example
  7358. select='not(mod(n\,100))'
  7359. @end example
  7360. @item
  7361. Select only frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:
  7362. @example
  7363. select=between(t\,10\,20)
  7364. @end example
  7365. @item
  7366. Select only I frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:
  7367. @example
  7368. select=between(t\,10\,20)*eq(pict_type\,I)
  7369. @end example
  7370. @item
  7371. Select frames with a minimum distance of 10 seconds:
  7372. @example
  7373. select='isnan(prev_selected_t)+gte(t-prev_selected_t\,10)'
  7374. @end example
  7375. @item
  7376. Use aselect to select only audio frames with samples number > 100:
  7377. @example
  7378. aselect='gt(samples_n\,100)'
  7379. @end example
  7380. @item
  7381. Create a mosaic of the first scenes:
  7382. @example
  7383. ffmpeg -i video.avi -vf select='gt(scene\,0.4)',scale=160:120,tile -frames:v 1 preview.png
  7384. @end example
  7385. Comparing @var{scene} against a value between 0.3 and 0.5 is generally a sane
  7386. choice.
  7387. @item
  7388. Send even and odd frames to separate outputs, and compose them:
  7389. @example
  7390. select=n=2:e='mod(n, 2)+1' [odd][even]; [odd] pad=h=2*ih [tmp]; [tmp][even] overlay=y=h
  7391. @end example
  7392. @end itemize
  7393. @section sendcmd, asendcmd
  7394. Send commands to filters in the filtergraph.
  7395. These filters read commands to be sent to other filters in the
  7396. filtergraph.
  7397. @code{sendcmd} must be inserted between two video filters,
  7398. @code{asendcmd} must be inserted between two audio filters, but apart
  7399. from that they act the same way.
  7400. The specification of commands can be provided in the filter arguments
  7401. with the @var{commands} option, or in a file specified by the
  7402. @var{filename} option.
  7403. These filters accept the following options:
  7404. @table @option
  7405. @item commands, c
  7406. Set the commands to be read and sent to the other filters.
  7407. @item filename, f
  7408. Set the filename of the commands to be read and sent to the other
  7409. filters.
  7410. @end table
  7411. @subsection Commands syntax
  7412. A commands description consists of a sequence of interval
  7413. specifications, comprising a list of commands to be executed when a
  7414. particular event related to that interval occurs. The occurring event
  7415. is typically the current frame time entering or leaving a given time
  7416. interval.
  7417. An interval is specified by the following syntax:
  7418. @example
  7419. @var{START}[-@var{END}] @var{COMMANDS};
  7420. @end example
  7421. The time interval is specified by the @var{START} and @var{END} times.
  7422. @var{END} is optional and defaults to the maximum time.
  7423. The current frame time is considered within the specified interval if
  7424. it is included in the interval [@var{START}, @var{END}), that is when
  7425. the time is greater or equal to @var{START} and is lesser than
  7426. @var{END}.
  7427. @var{COMMANDS} consists of a sequence of one or more command
  7428. specifications, separated by ",", relating to that interval. The
  7429. syntax of a command specification is given by:
  7430. @example
  7431. [@var{FLAGS}] @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} @var{ARG}
  7432. @end example
  7433. @var{FLAGS} is optional and specifies the type of events relating to
  7434. the time interval which enable sending the specified command, and must
  7435. be a non-null sequence of identifier flags separated by "+" or "|" and
  7436. enclosed between "[" and "]".
  7437. The following flags are recognized:
  7438. @table @option
  7439. @item enter
  7440. The command is sent when the current frame timestamp enters the
  7441. specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
  7442. previous frame timestamp was not in the given interval, and the
  7443. current is.
  7444. @item leave
  7445. The command is sent when the current frame timestamp leaves the
  7446. specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
  7447. previous frame timestamp was in the given interval, and the
  7448. current is not.
  7449. @end table
  7450. If @var{FLAGS} is not specified, a default value of @code{[enter]} is
  7451. assumed.
  7452. @var{TARGET} specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
  7453. the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
  7454. @var{COMMAND} specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
  7455. @var{ARG} is optional and specifies the optional list of argument for
  7456. the given @var{COMMAND}.
  7457. Between one interval specification and another, whitespaces, or
  7458. sequences of characters starting with @code{#} until the end of line,
  7459. are ignored and can be used to annotate comments.
  7460. A simplified BNF description of the commands specification syntax
  7461. follows:
  7462. @example
  7463. @var{COMMAND_FLAG} ::= "enter" | "leave"
  7464. @var{COMMAND_FLAGS} ::= @var{COMMAND_FLAG} [(+|"|")@var{COMMAND_FLAG}]
  7465. @var{COMMAND} ::= ["[" @var{COMMAND_FLAGS} "]"] @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} [@var{ARG}]
  7466. @var{COMMANDS} ::= @var{COMMAND} [,@var{COMMANDS}]
  7467. @var{INTERVAL} ::= @var{START}[-@var{END}] @var{COMMANDS}
  7468. @var{INTERVALS} ::= @var{INTERVAL}[;@var{INTERVALS}]
  7469. @end example
  7470. @subsection Examples
  7471. @itemize
  7472. @item
  7473. Specify audio tempo change at second 4:
  7474. @example
  7475. asendcmd=c='4.0 atempo tempo 1.5',atempo
  7476. @end example
  7477. @item
  7478. Specify a list of drawtext and hue commands in a file.
  7479. @example
  7480. # show text in the interval 5-10
  7481. 5.0-10.0 [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=hello world',
  7482. [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=';
  7483. # desaturate the image in the interval 15-20
  7484. 15.0-20.0 [enter] hue s 0,
  7485. [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=nocolor',
  7486. [leave] hue s 1,
  7487. [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=color';
  7488. # apply an exponential saturation fade-out effect, starting from time 25
  7489. 25 [enter] hue s exp(25-t)
  7490. @end example
  7491. A filtergraph allowing to read and process the above command list
  7492. stored in a file @file{test.cmd}, can be specified with:
  7493. @example
  7494. sendcmd=f=test.cmd,drawtext=fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='',hue
  7495. @end example
  7496. @end itemize
  7497. @anchor{setpts}
  7498. @section setpts, asetpts
  7499. Change the PTS (presentation timestamp) of the input frames.
  7500. @code{setpts} works on video frames, @code{asetpts} on audio frames.
  7501. This filter accepts the following options:
  7502. @table @option
  7503. @item expr
  7504. The expression which is evaluated for each frame to construct its timestamp.
  7505. @end table
  7506. The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following
  7507. constants:
  7508. @table @option
  7509. @item FRAME_RATE
  7510. frame rate, only defined for constant frame-rate video
  7511. @item PTS
  7512. the presentation timestamp in input
  7513. @item N
  7514. the count of the input frame for video or the number of consumed samples,
  7515. not including the current frame for audio, starting from 0.
  7516. @item NB_CONSUMED_SAMPLES
  7517. the number of consumed samples, not including the current frame (only
  7518. audio)
  7519. @item NB_SAMPLES, S
  7520. the number of samples in the current frame (only audio)
  7521. @item SAMPLE_RATE, SR
  7522. audio sample rate
  7523. @item STARTPTS
  7524. the PTS of the first frame
  7525. @item STARTT
  7526. the time in seconds of the first frame
  7527. @item INTERLACED
  7528. tell if the current frame is interlaced
  7529. @item T
  7530. the time in seconds of the current frame
  7531. @item POS
  7532. original position in the file of the frame, or undefined if undefined
  7533. for the current frame
  7534. @item PREV_INPTS
  7535. previous input PTS
  7536. @item PREV_INT
  7537. previous input time in seconds
  7538. @item PREV_OUTPTS
  7539. previous output PTS
  7540. @item PREV_OUTT
  7541. previous output time in seconds
  7542. @item RTCTIME
  7543. wallclock (RTC) time in microseconds. This is deprecated, use time(0)
  7544. instead.
  7545. @item RTCSTART
  7546. wallclock (RTC) time at the start of the movie in microseconds
  7547. @item TB
  7548. timebase of the input timestamps
  7549. @end table
  7550. @subsection Examples
  7551. @itemize
  7552. @item
  7553. Start counting PTS from zero
  7554. @example
  7555. setpts=PTS-STARTPTS
  7556. @end example
  7557. @item
  7558. Apply fast motion effect:
  7559. @example
  7560. setpts=0.5*PTS
  7561. @end example
  7562. @item
  7563. Apply slow motion effect:
  7564. @example
  7565. setpts=2.0*PTS
  7566. @end example
  7567. @item
  7568. Set fixed rate of 25 frames per second:
  7569. @example
  7570. setpts=N/(25*TB)
  7571. @end example
  7572. @item
  7573. Set fixed rate 25 fps with some jitter:
  7574. @example
  7575. setpts='1/(25*TB) * (N + 0.05 * sin(N*2*PI/25))'
  7576. @end example
  7577. @item
  7578. Apply an offset of 10 seconds to the input PTS:
  7579. @example
  7580. setpts=PTS+10/TB
  7581. @end example
  7582. @item
  7583. Generate timestamps from a "live source" and rebase onto the current timebase:
  7584. @example
  7585. setpts='(RTCTIME - RTCSTART) / (TB * 1000000)'
  7586. @end example
  7587. @item
  7588. Generate timestamps by counting samples:
  7589. @example
  7590. asetpts=N/SR/TB
  7591. @end example
  7592. @end itemize
  7593. @section settb, asettb
  7594. Set the timebase to use for the output frames timestamps.
  7595. It is mainly useful for testing timebase configuration.
  7596. This filter accepts the following options:
  7597. @table @option
  7598. @item expr, tb
  7599. The expression which is evaluated into the output timebase.
  7600. @end table
  7601. The value for @option{tb} is an arithmetic expression representing a
  7602. rational. The expression can contain the constants "AVTB" (the default
  7603. timebase), "intb" (the input timebase) and "sr" (the sample rate,
  7604. audio only). Default value is "intb".
  7605. @subsection Examples
  7606. @itemize
  7607. @item
  7608. Set the timebase to 1/25:
  7609. @example
  7610. settb=expr=1/25
  7611. @end example
  7612. @item
  7613. Set the timebase to 1/10:
  7614. @example
  7615. settb=expr=0.1
  7616. @end example
  7617. @item
  7618. Set the timebase to 1001/1000:
  7619. @example
  7620. settb=1+0.001
  7621. @end example
  7622. @item
  7623. Set the timebase to 2*intb:
  7624. @example
  7625. settb=2*intb
  7626. @end example
  7627. @item
  7628. Set the default timebase value:
  7629. @example
  7630. settb=AVTB
  7631. @end example
  7632. @end itemize
  7633. @section showspectrum
  7634. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio frequency
  7635. spectrum.
  7636. The filter accepts the following options:
  7637. @table @option
  7638. @item size, s
  7639. Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
  7640. the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is
  7641. @code{640x512}.
  7642. @item slide
  7643. Specify if the spectrum should slide along the window. Default value is
  7644. @code{0}.
  7645. @item mode
  7646. Specify display mode.
  7647. It accepts the following values:
  7648. @table @samp
  7649. @item combined
  7650. all channels are displayed in the same row
  7651. @item separate
  7652. all channels are displayed in separate rows
  7653. @end table
  7654. Default value is @samp{combined}.
  7655. @item color
  7656. Specify display color mode.
  7657. It accepts the following values:
  7658. @table @samp
  7659. @item channel
  7660. each channel is displayed in a separate color
  7661. @item intensity
  7662. each channel is is displayed using the same color scheme
  7663. @end table
  7664. Default value is @samp{channel}.
  7665. @item scale
  7666. Specify scale used for calculating intensity color values.
  7667. It accepts the following values:
  7668. @table @samp
  7669. @item lin
  7670. linear
  7671. @item sqrt
  7672. square root, default
  7673. @item cbrt
  7674. cubic root
  7675. @item log
  7676. logarithmic
  7677. @end table
  7678. Default value is @samp{sqrt}.
  7679. @item saturation
  7680. Set saturation modifier for displayed colors. Negative values provide
  7681. alternative color scheme. @code{0} is no saturation at all.
  7682. Saturation must be in [-10.0, 10.0] range.
  7683. Default value is @code{1}.
  7684. @item win_func
  7685. Set window function.
  7686. It accepts the following values:
  7687. @table @samp
  7688. @item none
  7689. No samples pre-processing (do not expect this to be faster)
  7690. @item hann
  7691. Hann window
  7692. @item hamming
  7693. Hamming window
  7694. @item blackman
  7695. Blackman window
  7696. @end table
  7697. Default value is @code{hann}.
  7698. @end table
  7699. The usage is very similar to the showwaves filter; see the examples in that
  7700. section.
  7701. @subsection Examples
  7702. @itemize
  7703. @item
  7704. Large window with logarithmic color scaling:
  7705. @example
  7706. showspectrum=s=1280x480:scale=log
  7707. @end example
  7708. @item
  7709. Complete example for a colored and sliding spectrum per channel using @command{ffplay}:
  7710. @example
  7711. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
  7712. [a] showspectrum=mode=separate:color=intensity:slide=1:scale=cbrt [out0]'
  7713. @end example
  7714. @end itemize
  7715. @section showwaves
  7716. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the samples waves.
  7717. The filter accepts the following options:
  7718. @table @option
  7719. @item size, s
  7720. Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
  7721. the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value
  7722. is "600x240".
  7723. @item mode
  7724. Set display mode.
  7725. Available values are:
  7726. @table @samp
  7727. @item point
  7728. Draw a point for each sample.
  7729. @item line
  7730. Draw a vertical line for each sample.
  7731. @end table
  7732. Default value is @code{point}.
  7733. @item n
  7734. Set the number of samples which are printed on the same column. A
  7735. larger value will decrease the frame rate. Must be a positive
  7736. integer. This option can be set only if the value for @var{rate}
  7737. is not explicitly specified.
  7738. @item rate, r
  7739. Set the (approximate) output frame rate. This is done by setting the
  7740. option @var{n}. Default value is "25".
  7741. @end table
  7742. @subsection Examples
  7743. @itemize
  7744. @item
  7745. Output the input file audio and the corresponding video representation
  7746. at the same time:
  7747. @example
  7748. amovie=a.mp3,asplit[out0],showwaves[out1]
  7749. @end example
  7750. @item
  7751. Create a synthetic signal and show it with showwaves, forcing a
  7752. frame rate of 30 frames per second:
  7753. @example
  7754. aevalsrc=sin(1*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t):cos(2*PI*200*t),asplit[out0],showwaves=r=30[out1]
  7755. @end example
  7756. @end itemize
  7757. @section split, asplit
  7758. Split input into several identical outputs.
  7759. @code{asplit} works with audio input, @code{split} with video.
  7760. The filter accepts a single parameter which specifies the number of outputs. If
  7761. unspecified, it defaults to 2.
  7762. @subsection Examples
  7763. @itemize
  7764. @item
  7765. Create two separate outputs from the same input:
  7766. @example
  7767. [in] split [out0][out1]
  7768. @end example
  7769. @item
  7770. To create 3 or more outputs, you need to specify the number of
  7771. outputs, like in:
  7772. @example
  7773. [in] asplit=3 [out0][out1][out2]
  7774. @end example
  7775. @item
  7776. Create two separate outputs from the same input, one cropped and
  7777. one padded:
  7778. @example
  7779. [in] split [splitout1][splitout2];
  7780. [splitout1] crop=100:100:0:0 [cropout];
  7781. [splitout2] pad=200:200:100:100 [padout];
  7782. @end example
  7783. @item
  7784. Create 5 copies of the input audio with @command{ffmpeg}:
  7785. @example
  7786. ffmpeg -i INPUT -filter_complex asplit=5 OUTPUT
  7787. @end example
  7788. @end itemize
  7789. @section zmq, azmq
  7790. Receive commands sent through a libzmq client, and forward them to
  7791. filters in the filtergraph.
  7792. @code{zmq} and @code{azmq} work as a pass-through filters. @code{zmq}
  7793. must be inserted between two video filters, @code{azmq} between two
  7794. audio filters.
  7795. To enable these filters you need to install the libzmq library and
  7796. headers and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libzmq}.
  7797. For more information about libzmq see:
  7798. @url{http://www.zeromq.org/}
  7799. The @code{zmq} and @code{azmq} filters work as a libzmq server, which
  7800. receives messages sent through a network interface defined by the
  7801. @option{bind_address} option.
  7802. The received message must be in the form:
  7803. @example
  7804. @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} [@var{ARG}]
  7805. @end example
  7806. @var{TARGET} specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
  7807. the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
  7808. @var{COMMAND} specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
  7809. @var{ARG} is optional and specifies the optional argument list for the
  7810. given @var{COMMAND}.
  7811. Upon reception, the message is processed and the corresponding command
  7812. is injected into the filtergraph. Depending on the result, the filter
  7813. will send a reply to the client, adopting the format:
  7814. @example
  7815. @var{ERROR_CODE} @var{ERROR_REASON}
  7816. @var{MESSAGE}
  7817. @end example
  7818. @var{MESSAGE} is optional.
  7819. @subsection Examples
  7820. Look at @file{tools/zmqsend} for an example of a zmq client which can
  7821. be used to send commands processed by these filters.
  7822. Consider the following filtergraph generated by @command{ffplay}
  7823. @example
  7824. ffplay -dumpgraph 1 -f lavfi "
  7825. color=s=100x100:c=red [l];
  7826. color=s=100x100:c=blue [r];
  7827. nullsrc=s=200x100, zmq [bg];
  7828. [bg][l] overlay [bg+l];
  7829. [bg+l][r] overlay=x=100 "
  7830. @end example
  7831. To change the color of the left side of the video, the following
  7832. command can be used:
  7833. @example
  7834. echo Parsed_color_0 c yellow | tools/zmqsend
  7835. @end example
  7836. To change the right side:
  7837. @example
  7838. echo Parsed_color_1 c pink | tools/zmqsend
  7839. @end example
  7840. @c man end MULTIMEDIA FILTERS
  7841. @chapter Multimedia Sources
  7842. @c man begin MULTIMEDIA SOURCES
  7843. Below is a description of the currently available multimedia sources.
  7844. @section amovie
  7845. This is the same as @ref{movie} source, except it selects an audio
  7846. stream by default.
  7847. @anchor{movie}
  7848. @section movie
  7849. Read audio and/or video stream(s) from a movie container.
  7850. This filter accepts the following options:
  7851. @table @option
  7852. @item filename
  7853. The name of the resource to read (not necessarily a file but also a device or a
  7854. stream accessed through some protocol).
  7855. @item format_name, f
  7856. Specifies the format assumed for the movie to read, and can be either
  7857. the name of a container or an input device. If not specified the
  7858. format is guessed from @var{movie_name} or by probing.
  7859. @item seek_point, sp
  7860. Specifies the seek point in seconds, the frames will be output
  7861. starting from this seek point, the parameter is evaluated with
  7862. @code{av_strtod} so the numerical value may be suffixed by an IS
  7863. postfix. Default value is "0".
  7864. @item streams, s
  7865. Specifies the streams to read. Several streams can be specified,
  7866. separated by "+". The source will then have as many outputs, in the
  7867. same order. The syntax is explained in the ``Stream specifiers''
  7868. section in the ffmpeg manual. Two special names, "dv" and "da" specify
  7869. respectively the default (best suited) video and audio stream. Default
  7870. is "dv", or "da" if the filter is called as "amovie".
  7871. @item stream_index, si
  7872. Specifies the index of the video stream to read. If the value is -1,
  7873. the best suited video stream will be automatically selected. Default
  7874. value is "-1". Deprecated. If the filter is called "amovie", it will select
  7875. audio instead of video.
  7876. @item loop
  7877. Specifies how many times to read the stream in sequence.
  7878. If the value is less than 1, the stream will be read again and again.
  7879. Default value is "1".
  7880. Note that when the movie is looped the source timestamps are not
  7881. changed, so it will generate non monotonically increasing timestamps.
  7882. @end table
  7883. This filter allows to overlay a second video on top of main input of
  7884. a filtergraph as shown in this graph:
  7885. @example
  7886. input -----------> deltapts0 --> overlay --> output
  7887. ^
  7888. |
  7889. movie --> scale--> deltapts1 -------+
  7890. @end example
  7891. @subsection Examples
  7892. @itemize
  7893. @item
  7894. Skip 3.2 seconds from the start of the avi file in.avi, and overlay it
  7895. on top of the input labelled as "in":
  7896. @example
  7897. movie=in.avi:seek_point=3.2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
  7898. [in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  7899. [main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
  7900. @end example
  7901. @item
  7902. Read from a video4linux2 device, and overlay it on top of the input
  7903. labelled as "in":
  7904. @example
  7905. movie=/dev/video0:f=video4linux2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
  7906. [in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  7907. [main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
  7908. @end example
  7909. @item
  7910. Read the first video stream and the audio stream with id 0x81 from
  7911. dvd.vob; the video is connected to the pad named "video" and the audio is
  7912. connected to the pad named "audio":
  7913. @example
  7914. movie=dvd.vob:s=v:0+#0x81 [video] [audio]
  7915. @end example
  7916. @end itemize
  7917. @c man end MULTIMEDIA SOURCES